Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

mark you

  • 1 τοι

    τοι, prop. ethical dative of σύ (q. v.), but used as an enclit. Particle,
    A let me tell you, mark you, look you (in Engl. we freq. convey the impression by means of emphasis or tone), implying a real or imagined audience, freq. in Hom. and always in speeches (exc.

    ὃς δή τοι Il.10.316

    , Od.20.289),

    αἰσχρόν τοι δηρόν τε μένειν κτλ. Il.2.298

    ;

    ἀλλ' ἐφομαρτεῖτε· πλεόνων δέ τοι ἔργον ἄμεινον 12.412

     codd.; τοῦτο δέ τοι ἐρέουσα ἔπος.. εἶμι surely I will go, 1.419; ταύτης τοι γενεῆς.. εὔχομαι εἶναι (recapitulating) 6.211 (so at the close of a narrative, Theoc. 11.80); οὗτός τοι.. ἀπὸ στρατοῦ ἔρχεται ἀνήρ here comes, look you.., Il.10.341 (vulg.,

    οὗτός τις Aristarch.

    , etc.); freq. it is hard to dist. from the [dialect] Ep. dat., as in

    ποῦ τοι ἀπειλαὶ οἴχονται; 13.219

    ; so in Hes.Op. 287 (addressed to Perses), 347, 719, cf. Emp.17.14 (addressed to Pausanias), Pi.P.2.72 (addressed to Hiero), al.; and so in Trag. dialogue, A.Eu. 729, etc.;

    σέτοι κικλήσκω S.OC 1578

     (lyr.); betw. chorus and actor, Id.Ph. 855 (lyr.), etc.; folld. by a plural, Tyrt.10.11 (cf. 13); so

    ἄρσενάς τοι τῆσδε γῆς οἰκήτορας εὑρήσετε A.Supp. 952

    : hence, as addressed to an imaginary audience, without personal reference, introducing a general sentiment or maxim, Thgn.153;

    τὸ συγγενές τοι δεινόν A.Pr.39

    , al.
    II in subordinate clauses,
    1 temporal and causal,

    ἐπεί τοι h.Merc. 138

    , Pi.I.2.45, S.Tr. 321; freq.

    ἐπεί τοι καί E.Med. 677

    , Ar.Ach. 933, Pl.Tht. 142b, etc.;

    ὅτι τοι Id.R. 343a

    .
    2 conditional, εἴ τοι.., ἐὰν δέ τοι .., S.OT 549, 551, Ant. 327; in apodosi,

    εἰ γὰρ κτενοῦμεν.., σύ τοι πρώτη θάνοις ἄν Id.El. 582

    , cf. Il.22.488.
    3 final,

    ὅπως.. τοι S.El. 1469

    , cf. Hp.Morb.2.33.
    III freq. combined with other Particles,

    ἀλλά τοι Thgn.656

    , Pi.P.3.19, etc.;

    ἀλλὰ.. τοι A.Pers. 795

    , Ag. 1304, etc.; γάρ τοι (

    γάρ A. 11.9

    ); γέ τοι (γε 1.5); ἤτοι, καίτοι (v. sub vv.); μέν τοι (

    μέν B. 11.4

    ); μή τοι, οὔ τοι; cf. also τοιγάρ, τοιγάρτοι, τοιγαροῦν, τοίνυν; so in τοι ἄρα, τοι ἆρα, which however are mostly contracted by crasis into τἆρα; as also τοι ἄν into τἄν, μέντοι ἄν into μεντἄν.
    B Position: τοι usually stands early in the sentence (or clause), e.g.

    Ζεύς ἐστιν αἰθήρ, Ζεὺς δὲ γῆ, Ζεὺς δ' οὐρανός, Ζεύς τοι τὰ πάντα A.Fr.70

    , etc.
    2 hence τοι is sts. placed betw. Art. and Subst. or Adj., or betw. Prep. and Subst.,

    τό τ. μέγιστον Pl.Sph. 261c

    ;

    ἐπί τ. Ἀκράγαντι Pi.O.2.90

    , cf. Ar.Ec. 972, etc.; also after Prep. in compd. Verb,

    ἔκ τ. πέπληγμαι E.Hipp. 934

    , cf. Or. 1047, Ar.V. 784.
    3 τοι repeated,

    σύ τ. σύ τ. κατηξίωσας S.Ph. 1095

     (lyr.).
    ------------------------------------
    τοι, [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Aeol., [dialect] Ion., and [dialect] Ep. dat. sg. of σύ (q. v.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τοι

  • 2 δεῖνα

    δεῖνα, ὁ, ἡ, τό, gen. δεῖνος, dat. δεῖνι, acc. δεῖνα: sts. indecl. (v. infr.): nom. [full] δεῖν, ὁ, Sophr.58: gen. and dat. τοῦ δείνατος, τῷ δείνατι, A.D.Pron.60.12, EM614.51:—
    A such an one, so-and-so, always with Art.,

    ὁ δεῖνα Ar.Ra. 918

    , etc.;

    τὸν δεῖνα τὸν τοῦ δεῖνα Id.Th. 622

    ;

    ὁ δεῖνα τοῦ δεῖνος τὸν δεῖν' εἰσήγγειλεν D.13.5

    ;

    ἃ ἂν ὁ δ. ἢ ὁ δ. εἴπῃ Id.2.31

    ;

    ὁ δ. καὶ ὁ δ. Arist.Rh. 1416a23

    ;

    ἡ δεῖνα Ant.Lib.22

    ; τὸ δ., euphem. for τὸ πέος, Ar.Ach. 1149, cf. Sch.Luc.Bis Acc.23; τὸ δ. δ' ἐσθίεις; do you eat such a fish? Antiph.129.6: in gen., ἐμὸς ἢ τοῦ δεῖνος mine or some other's, Arist.Pol. 1262a3: dat.,

    τῷ δεῖνι μεμφόμενος D.20.104

    , cf. 37.56: pl.,

    οἱ δεῖνες Id.24.180

    ;

    τῶν δείνων Id.20.106

    .
    II τὸ δ. in Com. as an interjection to express an idea which suddenly strikes one, by the way, mark you, Ar.V. 524, Pax 268, etc.: in later Prose, Luc.Vit.Auct.19.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δεῖνα

  • 3 τε

    τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).
    A as a Conjunction,
    I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second,

    ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669

    ;

    δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491

    , cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375;

    τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8

    , cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b;

    λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13

    ; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g.

    ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7

    ;

    ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47

    ; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3;

    τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11

     (iii B.C.);

    κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494

    , cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times,

    ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530

    , cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives,

    ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56

    , cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.
    2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as

    ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22

    ; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as

    οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6

     (v.

    οὔτε 11.4

    ); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as

    οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67

    ; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.
    3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.
    a τε.. δὲ.. , as

    κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359

    , cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625;

    ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80

    ;

    διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3

    ; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.
    b

    μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291

    -3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.
    4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes,

    τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a

    ; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c;

    Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476

    ;

    κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5

    ; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.;

    δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242

    , cf. 253, 262, al.;

    εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5

    ; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.;

    ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11

     Def.7;

    πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18

     (iii B.C.);

    χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13

    , 61.1, 3.17.7;

    ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6

    , cf. 3.70.4;

    ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6

    , cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.);

    καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13

    , cf. 2.2.17;

    ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21

    , cf. 24, al.;

    ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4

    , cf. Gem.16.6;

    χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19

    , cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.
    II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g.

    Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7

    ; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293;

    ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308

    , cf. 327, 338, al.;

    τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47

    ;

    βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35

    ;

    ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c

    ;

    βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47

    ; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined,

    κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181

    ;

    μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194

    ; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193;

    ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24

    ;

    χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808

    ;

    ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927

    ; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives,

    διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168

    ;

    ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16

    ;

    θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427

    ;

    πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42

    :—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g.

    τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249

    , and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    ἄλλως 1.3

    .
    2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep.,

    σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99

    , cf. 1.400, al.; also

    τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469

    , cf. 8.162.
    3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.
    b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in

    καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9

    ;

    καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44

    ;

    καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68

    ; v. infr. c. 10.
    4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80;

    ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85

    ;

    ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100

    ;

    τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47

    , cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.
    5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.
    B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands:

    αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221

    ;

    οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147

    ;

    θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379

    , cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264;

    ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309

    , cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526;

    ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410

    ;

    οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392

    ;

    οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464

    ;

    ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228

    , cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322;

    ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32

    ;

    παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218

    ;

    αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294

    ; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307;

    τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733

    -4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83;

    ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201

    ;

    νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71

    ;

    κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592

    -4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499;

    νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265

    ;

    σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45

    , cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied);

    ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403

    , cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons,

    ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102

    ;

    οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86

    ; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521;

    μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410

    .
    2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g.

    Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334

    ;

    Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156

    ;

    δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395

    , cf. Il.17.249.
    3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:
    a the principal clause alone contains τε

    , ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218

    ;

    ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333

    ;

    εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165

    -6;

    ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530

    .
    b the subordinate clause alone contains τε

    , λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747

    ;

    ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207

    ;

    ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117

    , cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt.,

    ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221

    : it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.
    c both clauses contain τε

    , ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508

    -9;

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82

    -3.
    4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies,

    ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115

    ;

    πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447

    , cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105;

    βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52

    , cf. 18.485.
    5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160;

    ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338

    , cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332;

    κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438

    ;

    μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152

    : similarly in clauses with

    οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422

    ;

    οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160

    , cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.
    6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608;

    ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655

    ;

    ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582

    ;

    αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252

    , cf. 24.294;

    οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120

    ;

    δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238

    , cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415;

    οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293

    , cf. 14.464;

    πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217

    ;

    οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223

    .
    7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent,

    Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259

    ;

    Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39

    ;

    Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227

    , cf. 20.187;

    νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8

    ;

    Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84

    : similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects,

    οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43

    , cf. 2.669, Od.5.4;

    Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319

    ;

    Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246

    ;

    Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493

    ;

    τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203

    , cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν)

    ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467

    ; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary,

    οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649

    ;

    ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187

    ;

    τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105

    ;

    σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336

    ;

    καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357

    , cf. 346.
    8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g.

    Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85

    ;

    ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65

    , cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ)

    δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90

    , cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305;

    δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562

    ; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature,

    ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142

    ;

    ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247

    , cf. Od. 6.266;

    ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521

    , cf. Od.14.353.
    9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it,

    κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305

    , cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined,

    ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367

    .
    10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life,

    γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358

    ;

    τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451

    ;

    ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473

    , cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358;

    ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347

    .
    11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535,

    ὡς εἴ τε 9.314

    , 14.254, etc.
    II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing)

    Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35

    , cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has

    τά πέρ τε 1.74

    ,

    ὅκως τε 2.108

     codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al.,

    οἷά τε 1.93

     codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally

    ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17

    ;

    ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8

     (ii B.C.);

    ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3

     (iii B.C.);

    οἵ τε GDI215.23

     (Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962;

    ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1

    ; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which)

    ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5

    ;

    οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28

    .
    C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:
    1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats,

    σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13

    ;

    ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362

    ; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in

    οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367

    , cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in

    ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106

    ;

    σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836

    ; μέν τε in

    σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47

    , cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in

    οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204

    , cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.
    2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions,

    σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90

    , cf. Od.19.486;

    ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337

    ; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ')

    ἐᾶν 16.96

     (nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ')

    ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118

    ; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.
    3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him,

    ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55

    ;

    σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119

    , 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187;

    ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169

    ;

    οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52

    .
    4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference,

    κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270

    ; ὥς (= so)

    τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227

    ;

    τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28

    ; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166;

    εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83

     (s.v.l.);

    ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317

    ;

    νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456

    ;

    πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342

    ;

    δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466

    ;

    ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252

    ; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ')

    , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437

    , 21.596, cf. 15.709.
    5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18;

    ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203

    ;

    ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189

     (but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259);

    ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803

    , cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.
    6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning,

    χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244

    , cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.
    8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.
    9 in

    ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276

    , it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.
    10 Rarer and later uses;
    a also, esp. with

    ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29

    , cf. 17.273, Il.23.483;

    ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9

    , cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.);

    ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1

     (iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.);

    τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74

     (ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.
    b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word,

    εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238

    , cf. 15.484.
    c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.
    D Position of τε:
    1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317;

    ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136

    , cf. 4.505, 7.295;

    αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42

     codd., cf. 291 (anap.);

    ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69

    ;

    ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6

     (iii B.C.);

    τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a

    , cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε

    , τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41

     (lyr.);

    πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210

    ; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows,

    πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665

    ; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.
    2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.
    E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε

  • 4 ἄρα

    ἄρᾰ, [dialect] Ep. [full] ῥά (which is enclitic and used after monosyllables, ἦ, ὅς, γάρ, etc., or words ending in a vowel or diphthong, e.g. ἐπεί), before a consonant [full] ἄρ (perh. cf. Lith.
    A i[rtilde] 'and'): expressing consequence, then, or mere succession, there and then, and in many derived uses.
    A EARLIER USAGE: to denote,
    I immediate transition, there and then, straightway,

    ὣς φάτο βῆ δ' ἄρ' Ὄνειρος Il.2.16

    : after a part.,

    ὣς εἰπὼν κατ' ἄρ' ἕζετο 1.68

    , al.;

    πυθόμενος.. εἶπε ἄ. Hdt.4.134

    , cf. 9.9;

    ἐρωτώσης τῆς μητρὸς ἀπεκρίνατο ἄρα X.Cyr.1.3.2

    ; with other Particles, δέ, ἦ, ὡς, etc., cf. ὁ δὲ Ἀστυάγης ἄ. εἶπεν ib.4.10: also after Advbs. of Time, τότε δή ῥα, τῆμος ἄρα, etc.;

    οὕτως ἄρα Pl.Phdr. 259b

    ; often in apodosi, as

    αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ δὴ θηήσατο.. αὐτίκ' ἄρ' ἤλυθεν Od.5.77

    ; repeated

    τὼ μὲν ἄρ'.. κεῖντο ἡ δ' ἄρ'.. ἀγόρευε Il.21.426

    : in enumerations, e. g. in Homer's catalogue, then, next,

    οἱ δ' ἄρ' Ἀθήνας εἶχον 2.546

    ; so in genealogies,

    Σίσυφος.. ὁ δ' ἄ. Γλαῦκον τέκεθ' υἱόν 6.154

    .
    2 to draw attention, mark you!

    τὸν τρεῖς μὲν ἐπιρρήσσεσκον.. τῶν ἄλλων Ἀχιλεὺς δ' ἄρ' ἐπιρρήσσεσκε καὶ οἶος 24.456

    ; with imper.,

    ἀλλ' ἄγε δὴ κατ' ἄρ' ἕζευ 24.522

    : to point a moral or general statement,

    φευγόντων δ' οὔτ' ἂρ κλέος ὄρνυται οὔτε τις ἀλκή 5.532

    .
    II connexion, such as,
    1 that of antecedent and consequent,

    οἰνοχόει.. ἄσβεστος δ' ἄρ' ἐνῶρτο γέλως 1.599

    , cf. 24.507;

    τοὔνεκ' ἄρ' ἄλγε' ἔδωκε 1.96

    ; freq. with οὕνεκα in protasi, 7.140, al.: also in questions, τίς τ' ἄρ τῶν ὄχ' ἄριστος ἔην; who then (say you) was.. ? 2.761: with demonstr. Pronoun in recapitulation, ἀλλ' υἱὸν Πριάμοιο.. τόν ῥ' Ὀδυσεὺς βάλε he it was, whom.., 4.501: freq. in such phrases as

    ὣς ἄρα φωνήσας 2.35

    , al.;

    ὣς ἄρ' ἔφη 1.584

    , al.;

    ἦ ῥα 3.355

    , al., thus, then he spoke.—This usage is universal in Greek.
    2 explanation of that which precedes, χωόμενον κατὰ θυμὸν ἐϋζώνοιο γυναικὸς τήν ῥα.. ἀπηύρων whom ( and for this cause he was angry) they had taken away, 1.429; εἰ μὴ ὑπερφίαλον ἔπος ἔκβαλε.. φῆ ῥ' ἀέκητι θεῶν φυγέειν for he said, Od.4.504: freq. with οὕνεκα; so with relatives, ἐκ δ' ἔθορε κλῆρος ὃν ἄρ' ἤθελον αὐτοί the very one which.., Il.7.182.
    B LATER USAGE, always with inferential force: 1. in drawing conclusions (more subjective than οὖν)

    , ἄριστον ἄ. ἡ εὐδαιμονία Arist.EN 1099a24

    ;

    δῆλον ἄ. Id.Pol. 1295b33

    ; in pseudo-syllogistic conclusions, Id.SE 174b11, Rh. 1401a3, al.: esp. by way of informal inference, as it seems,

    οὐκ ἄ. σοί γε πατὴρ ἦν Πηλεύς Il.16.33

    ;

    οὐδ' ἄ. πως ἦν ἐν πάντεσσ' ἔργοισι δαήμονα φῶτα γενέσθαι 23.670

    ;

    μάτην ἄρ', ὡς ἔοικεν, ἥκομεν S.El. 772

    ; οὕτω κοινόν τι ἄ. χαρᾷ καὶ λύπῃ δάκρυά ἐστιν so true is it that.., X.HG7.1.32;

    πολὺ γὰρ ἀμείνων ἄ. ὁ τοῦ ἀδίκου ἢ ὁ τοῦ δικαίου βίος Pl.R. 358c

    ;

    ἦν ἄ. πυρός γ' ἕτερα.. θερμότερα Ar.Eq. 382

    ;

    ὦ τλῆμον ἀρετή, λόγος ἄρ' ἦσθα Trag.Adesp.374

    ; so in announcing the discovery or correction of an error, as οὐκ ἐννενοήκαμεν ὅτι εἰσὶν ἄ. .. Pl.R. 375d; φαίνεται πρὸ ποδῶν ἡμῖν κυλινδεῖσθαι καὶ οὐχ ἑωρῶμεν ἄρ' αὐτό ib. 432d; εἰκότως ἄ. οὐκ ἐγίγνετο· ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ νῦν πυνθάνομαι.. X.An.2.2.3.
    2 in questions, expressing the anxiety of the questioner, τίς ἄ. ῥύσεται; who is there to save ? A.Th.92; so in exclamations to heighten the expression of emotion, οἵαν ἄρ' ἥβην.. ἀπώλεσεν what a band of youth was that.. ! Id.Pers. 733; so ὡς ἄρα ib. 472, S.Fr. 577;

    τί μ' ἄ. τί μ' ὀλέκεις; Id.Ant. 1285

    ;

    τί οὖν.. ἄ. X.Oec.6.2

    ; πῶς ἄ.; οὕτως ἄ., etc.; ἄ. alone,

    ἔζης ἄ. S.Fr. 686

    : esp. in ironical comments, Ar.Av. 476, 1371, etc.
    3 epexegetic, namely, ἐρῶ, ὡς ἄ. .. Pl.Tht. 152d, cf. 156e.
    4 for τοι ἄρα, τἄρα, v. sub τοι 11.2.
    5 εἰ (or ἐάν) μὴ ἄ. unless perhaps, Pl.Ap. 38b, D.58.4; separated from εἰ μή, Id.9.20; with irony,

    εἰ μὴ ἄ. ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8

    .
    6 in hypothetical clauses, to indicate the improbability of the supposition,

    ἢν ἄ. ποτὲ κατὰ γῆν βιασθῶσιν Th.1.93

    , etc.; or simply, perhaps (sts. separated from εἰ)

    , εἴ τις οὖν ὑμῶν ἄ... ὑπελάμβανεν D.21.8

    ;

    εἴ τις ἰδίᾳ τινὰ δεδιὼς ἄ. ἀπρόθυμός ἐστιν Th.4.86

    .
    C IN CRASIS, freq. τἄρα, μεντἄρα, οὐτἄρα: also δήξομἄρα for δήξομαι ἄ., Ar.Ach. 325; οἰμώξετἄρα, κλαύσἄρα, Id.Th. 248, Pax 532: also in Trag., E.Hyps.Fr.34.86.
    D ἄρα never stands first in the sentence in Classical Greek (Arist.Mech. 851a22 is corrupt), but is found at the beginning of an apodosis in Ev.Matt.12.28, Ep.Rom.10.17, and first in a sentence, Ev.Luc.11.48, Vett.Val.305.20; in conclusion of syllogism, Herm. ap.Stob.3.11.31.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄρα

  • 5 ἄρα

    + 3-0-7-23-5=38 Gn 18,3; 20,11; Nm 22,11; Is 56,3; Jer 4,10
    always with inferential force; mark you (to draw attention) Ps 30(31),23; then (for conclusion, often after εἰ-cl.) Jb 40,14; therefore (conclusion in syllogism) Wis 6,20; indeed Is 56,3; surely Gn 20,11; εἰ ἄρα if indeed Gn 18,3
    *Ps 57(58),2 ἄρα indeed-אולם for MT אלם silence?
    Cf. CLARK 1972, 70-84

    Lust (λαγνεία) > ἄρα

  • 6 σημεῖον

    σημεῖον, ου, τό (s. prec. entry; Aeschyl., Hdt.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb.; Hippol., Ref. 6, 27, 4; Did., Gen. 115, 9 ‘symbol’; gener. ‘sign’)
    ① a sign or distinguishing mark whereby someth. is known, sign, token, indication (Diod S 3, 66, 3=evidences τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ θεοῦ; Cornutus 16 p. 21, 9.—Arrian, Anab. 6, 26, 4 of marks in the landscape showing direction; ParJer 5:11 τὰ ς. τῆς πόλεως; Just., A I, 55, 6 al.; Iren. 1, 14, 8 [Harv. I 143, 10]; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 43, 36 ς. τῆς μετὰ θάνατον ἐπιφανείας αὐτοῦ [sc. Ἰησοῦ]; 2, 59, 6 of the scars of the resurrected Lord τὰ ς. τῆς κολάσεως). τοῦτο ὑμῖν σημεῖον this (will be) a sign for you Lk 2:12 (cp. Is 37:30). ὅ ἐστιν ς. ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ this is the mark of genuineness in every letter 2 Th 3:17 (Ps.-Pla., Ep. 13, 360a has at its beginning the words σύμβολον ὅτι παρʼ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν). Of a signal previously agreed upon δοῦναί τινι σημεῖον (PFay 128, 7 ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν σημεῖον ‘he gave us a signal’; Jos., Ant. 12, 404) Mt 26:48; 1 Cl 12:7.— A sign of things to come (PsSol 15:9 τὸ … σημεῖον ἀπωλείας ἐπὶ τοῦ μετώπου αὐτῶν; Did., Gen. 191, 6; Philo, Op. M. 58 σημεῖα μελλόντων; Jos., Bell. 6, 285; 296; 297) Mk 13:4; Lk 21:7. The event to be expected is added in the gen. τί τὸ ς. τῆς σῆς παρουσίας; Mt 24:3. τὸ ς. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου the sign by which one can mark the coming of the Human One (Son of Man) vs. 30 (TGlasson, JTS 15, ’64, 299f [a military metaphor, ‘standard’; cp. Is 18:3; 1QM 3f]). τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν the signs of the (end)times (καιρός 3b) Mt 16:3.— A sign of warning (Plut., Caes. 737 [63, 1]; SibOr 3, 457; Mel., P. 14, 90) 1 Cl 11:2. Prob. in like manner αἱ γλῶσσαι εἰς σημεῖόν εἰσιν τοῖς ἀπίστοις the tongues (γλῶσσα 3) serve as a (warning) sign to the unbelievers 1 Cor 14:22. Likew. the sign of Jonah (s. Ἰωνᾶς 1) in Luke: Lk 11:29, 30. Here the Human One is to be a sign to his generation, as Jonah was to the Ninevites; cp. οὗτος κεῖται εἰς σημεῖον ἀντιλεγόμενον (s. ἀντιλέγω 2) 2:34 (cp. Is 11:12).—W-S. §30, 10d.—GRunze, Das Zeichen des Menschensohnes u. der Doppelsinn des Jonazeichens 1897 (against him PSchmiedel, Lit. Centralblatt 48, 1897, 513–15; Runze again, ZWT 41, 1898, 171–85; finally PSchm. ibid. 514–25); PAsmussen, Protestantenblatt 37, 1904, 375–8; STyson, Bibl. World 33,1909, 96–101; CBowen, AJT 20, 1916, 414–21; JMichael, JTS 21, 1920, 146–59; JBonsirven, RSR 24, ’34, 450–55; HGale, JBL 60, ’41, 255–60; PSeidelin, Das Jonaszeichen, StTh 5, ’51, 119–31; AVögtle, Wikenhauser Festschr. ’53, 230–77; OGlombitza, D. Zeichen des Jona, NTS 8, ’62, 359–66.—In the OT circumcision is σημεῖον διαθήκης=a sign or token of belonging to the covenant (Gen 17:11). For Paul this sign becomes a mark, or seal (so σημεῖον: PRev 26, 5 [III B.C.]; PRein 9 introd. [II B.C.]; 35, 3; BGU 1064, 18) σημεῖον ἔλαβεν περιτομῆς σφραγῖδα he got the mark of circumcision as a seal Ro 4:11. In the difficult pass. B 12:5 ἐν σημείῳ is prob. best taken as by a sign; but it is poss. that the text is defective (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.; RKraft, Did. and Barnabas ’65, 119 note: ‘standard, norm’).—τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12a belongs rather to the next category; the signs of the (true) apostle (cp. SIG 831, 14 [117 A.D.] ἡγούμην σημεῖα ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν) are, as is shown by the verb κατειργάσθη and what follows, the wonders or miracles performed by him.
    ② an event that is an indication or confirmation of intervention by transcendent powers, miracle, portent
    α. a miracle of divine origin, performed by God himself, by Christ, or by men of God (cp. Diod S 5, 70, 4 πολλὰ ς. of the young Zeus; 16, 27, 2 ἐγένετο αὐτῷ σημεῖον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος; Strabo 16, 2, 35 παρὰ τ. θεοῦ ς.; Appian, Ital. 8 §1 σημείων γενομένων ἐκ Διός, Hann. 56 §233; SIG 709, 25 [c. 107 B.C.] διὰ τῶν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ γενομένων σαμείων; PGM 1, 65; 74; Jos., Ant. 2, 274; 280; Mel., P. 78, 568): Mt 12:38f; 16:1 (ς. ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ), 4; Mk 8:11 (ς. ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, as Synes., Prov. 1, 7; s. OLinton, The Demand for a Sign from Heaven, StTh 19, ’65, 112–29; JGibson, JSNT 38, ’90, 37–66, a phenomenon suggesting divine deliverance), 12; 16:17, 20; Lk 11:16 (ς. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), 29 (s. 1 above); 23:8; J 2:11, 18, 23; 3:2; 4:54; 6:2, 14, 26, 30; 7:31; 9:16; 10:41; 11:47; 12:18, 37; 20:30 (on σημ. as a designation of Jesus’ miracles in J s. Hdb. on J 2:11 and 6:26; JBernard, ICC John 1929, I introd. 176–86; CBarrett, The Gosp. acc. to St. John, ’55, 62–65); Ac 4:16, 22 (τὸ ς. τῆς ἰάσεως the miracle of healing); 8:6; 1 Cor 1:22; Agr 9. τί εἴδετε σημεῖον ἐπὶ τὸν γεννηθέντα βασιλέα; what kind of sign did you see over the newborn king? GJs 21:2 (codd.). τὸ σημεῖον τὸ ἐνάρετον the marvelous sign AcPl Ha 3,16.—σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα (Polyb. 3, 112, 8 σημείων δὲ καὶ τεράτων πᾶν μὲν ἱερόν, πᾶσα δʼ ἦν οἰκία πλήρης; Plut., Alex. 706 [75, 1 sing.]; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 36 §144 τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα οὐράνια; 4, 4 §14; Aelian, VH 12, 57; Philo, Mos. 1, 95, Aet. M. 2; Jos., Bell. 1, 28, Ant. 20, 168. Oft. in LXX: Ex 7:3; Dt 4:34; 6:22; 7:19 al.; Is 8:18; 20:3; Jer 39:21; Wsd 8:8; 10:16) J 4:48; Ac 2:43; 4:30; 5:12; 6:8; 7:36; 14:3; 15:12; Ro 15:19; Hb 2:4; 1 Cl 51:5; B 4:14; 5:8. δυνάμεις καὶ τέρατα κ. σημεῖα Ac 2:22; 2 Cor 12:12b (SSchreiber, Paulus als Wundertäter: BZNW 79, ’96) σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις Ac 8:13.—1 Cl 25:1; 2 Cl 15:4. SMc-Casland, JBL 76, ’57, 149–52; MWhittaker, Studia Evangelica 5, ’68, 155–58.
    β. worked by Satan or his agents to mislead God’s people (s. Iren. 5, 28, 2 [Harv. V 401, 32]) Rv 13:13f; 16:14; 19:20. σημεῖα κ. τέρατα Mt 24:24; Mk 13:22 (GBeasley-Murray, A Commentary on Mk 13, ’57; EGrässer, D. Problem der Parusie-verzögerung, ’57, 152–70); 2 Th 2:9; D 16:4.
    ⓑ portent terrifying appearances in the heavens, never before seen, as portents of the last days Lk 21:11, 25 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 4 §14 σημεῖα πολλά around the sun; AscIs 3, 20); Ac 2:19 (cp. Jo 3:3); s. D 16:6. Of that which the seer of the Apocalypse sees ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ Rv 12:1, 3; 15:1. Of the portentous signs in heaven and earth at the death of Jesus GPt 8:28 (cp. Da 6:28 Theod. σημεῖα κ. τέρατα ἐν οὐρανῷ κ. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς; Diod S 38 + 39 Fgm. 5: at the end of each one of the eight ages ordained by God there is a σημεῖον ἐκ γῆς ἢ οὐρανοῦ θαυμάσιον).—On miracles s. SIG 1168–73; RLembert, Das Wunder bei Römern u. Griechen I 1905; RReitzenstein, Hellenist. Wundererzählungen 1906, OWeinreich, Antike Heilungswunder 1909, Gebet u. Wunder: WSchmid Festschr. 1929, 169ff; PWendland, De Fabellis Antiquis earumque ad Christianos Propagatione 1911; FKutsch, Attische Heilgötter u. Heilheroen 1913; WJayne, The Healing Gods of Ancient Civilizations 1925; RHerzog, D. Wunderheilungen v. Epidaurus ’31; PFiebig, Jüdische Wundergeschichten des ntl. Zeitalters 1911; ASchlatter, Das Wunder in d. Synagoge 1912.—RLehmann, Naturwissenschaft u. bibl. Wunderfrage 1930; GNaumann, Die Wertschätzung des Wunders im NT 1903; GTraub, Das Wunder im NT2 1907; KBeth, Die Wunder Jesu 1908; JThompson, Miracles in the NT 1911; LFonck, Die Wunder des Herrn im Ev.2 1907; LFillion, Les miracles de Jésus-Christ 1909/1910; PDausch, Die Wunder Jesu 1912; SEitrem, Nordisk Tidskrift for Filologie 5, 1919, 30–36; RBultmann, Die Gesch. der synopt. Tradition2 ’31, 223–60; RJelke, Die Wunder Jesu 1922; GShafto, The Wonders of the Kingdom 1924; JBest, The Miracles of Christ in the Light of our Present Day Knowledge ’37; TTorrance, Expository Studies in St. John’s Miracles ’38; ARichardson, The Miracle Stories of the Gospels ’41; AFridrichsen, Le Problème du Miracle dans le Christianisme primitif: Études d’ Hist. et de Phil. rel. XII 1925; HSchlingensiepen, Die Wunder des NT ’33; OPerels, D. Wunderüberlieferung der Synoptiker ’34; PSaintyves, Essais de folklore biblique 1923; GMarquardt, D. Wunderproblem in d. deutschen prot. Theologie der Gegenwart ’33; GDelling, D. Verständnis des Wunders im NT, ZST 24, ’55, 265–80, Zur Beurteilung des Wunders durch d. Antike: Studien zum NT ’70, 53–71; SMcCasland, Signs and Wonders, JBL 76, ’57, 149–52; CBarrett, The Gosp. Acc. to John ’55, 62–65; JCharlier, La notion de signe (sêmeion) dans J: RSPT 43, ’59, 434–48; PRiga, Signs of Glory (J): Int 17, ’63, 402–24; HvanderLoos, The Miracles of Jesus ’65; WNicol, The Semeia in the Fourth Gosp. ’72; for Acts s. FNeirynck, the Miracle Stories in the Acts of the Apostles, An Introduction, in Les Actes des Apôtres, ed. JKremer ’79, 169–213.—Esp. on the healing of demoniacs JWeiss, RE IV 408ff; JJaeger, Ist Jesus Christus ein Suggestionstherapeut gewesen? 1918; KKnur, M.D., Christus medicus? 1905; KDusberger, Bibel u. Kirche ’51, 114–17 (foretoken).—RGrant, Miracle and Natural Law in Graeco-Roman and Early Christian Thought ’52. S. also the lit. s.v. δαιμόνιον 2.—See further MWestermann, ed. ΠΑΡΑΔΟΞΑΓΡΑΦΟΙ, Scriptores Rerum Mirabilium Graeci, 1839.—B. 914. DELG s.v. σῆμα. M-M. DBS XII 1281–1330. EDNT. ABD IV 869 (lit.). TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σημεῖον

  • 7 μέν

    μέν affirmative particle, a weakened form of μήν (Hom.+). One of the commonest particles in Hom., Hdt. et al., but its usage declines sharply in later times. Found only 180 times in the NT. In seven of these places the editions vary (Mk 9:12; Ac 23:8; Ro 7:25; 16:19; 1 Cor 2:15; 12:20: in Ro 16:19; Gal 4:23 W-H. bracket the word). The mss. show an even greater variation. In Rv, 2 Th, 1 Ti, Tit, Phlm, 2 Pt, 1, 2, 3J it does not occur at all; Eph, Col, 1 Th, Js have only one occurrence each. It is also quite rare in 1, 2 Cl, Ign, GPt, but is common in Ac, Hb, B and esp. in Dg. It never begins a clause. Cp. Kühner-G. II p. 264ff; Schwyzer II 569f; Denniston 359–97; B-D-F §447; Rob. 1150–53; Mlt-Turner 331f.
    ① marker of correlation, w. other particles
    ⓐ introducing a concessive clause, followed by another clause w. an adversative particle: to be sure … but, on the one hand … on the other hand, though in many cases an equivalence translation will not fit this scheme; rather, the contrast is to be emphasized in the second clause, often with but.
    α. μὲν … δέ: ἐγὼ μὲν ὑμᾶς βαπτίζω … ὁ δὲ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος Mt 3:11. ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς … οἱ δὲ ἐργάται 9:37. τὸ μὲν ποτήριόν μου πίεσθε … τὸ δὲ καθίσαι 20:23. ὁ μὲν υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου … οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ Mk 14:21. τοῦ μὲν πρώτου κατέαξαν τὰ σκέλη … ἐπὶ δὲ τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες J 19:32 and oft. Cp. Mt 22:8; Ac 21:39; Ro 6:11; 1 Cor 9:24; 11:14; 12:20; 2 Cor 10:10; Hb 3:5; 1 Pt 1:20.—In combination w. conjunctions: εἰ μὲν … εἰ δέ if … but if Dg 3:2 (TestJob 23:5; Ar. 13:7). εἰ μὲν οὖν … εἰ δέ if then … but if Ac 19:38; cp. 25:11. εἰ μὲν … νῦν δέ if … but now Hb 11:15. μὲν οὖν … δέ ( now) indeed … but J 19:24; 20:30; Ac 8:4; 12:5; 1 Cor 9:25. μὲν γὰρ … δέ/ἀλλά for indeed … but (Wsd 7:30; Job 28:2; 2 Macc 6:4; 7:36; 4 Macc 9:8f, 31f) Ac 13:36f; 23:8; 28:22; Ro 2:25; 1 Cor 5:3; 11:7; 2 Cor 9:1–3; 11:4; Hb 7:18, 20f; 12:10; Ac 28:22 (in reverse order): also ἀλλά for δέ in apodosis 4:16f (as 3 Macc 2:15f), s. β. κἂν μὲν …, εἰ δὲ μήγε if … but if not Lk 13:9. ἐὰν μὲν …, ἐὰν δὲ μή Mt 10:13. W. prep. εἰς μὲν … εἰς δέ Hb 9:6.
    β. μὲν … ἀλλά to be sure … but (Thu. 3, 2, 1; X., Oec. 3, 6; Tetr. Iamb. 1, 2, 3; TestJob 4:1; Ath. 16, 1) Mk 9:12 (v.l. without μέν). πάντα μὲν καθαρὰ ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ to be sure everything is clean, but … Ro 14:20. σὺ μὲν γὰρ καλῶς … ἀλλʼ ὁ ἕτερος 1 Cor 14:17. Cp. Ac 4:16 (s. α).
    γ. μὲν … πλήν indeed … but (Galen, Inst. Log. c. 8, 2 Kalbfl. [1896]) Lk 22:22.
    ⓑ without any real concessive sense on the part of μέν, but adversative force in δέ, so that μέν need not be translated at all: αὐτοὶ μὲν … ὑμεῖς δέ Lk 11:48; cp. Ac 13:36. ἐγὼ μὲν … ἐγὼ δέ 1 Cor 1:12. τοῖς μὲν ἀπολλυμένοις … τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις vs. 18. Ἰουδαίοις μὲν … ἔθνεσι δέ vs. 23. ἐμοὶ μὲν … ὑμῖν δέ Phil 3:1. εἰ μὲν … εἰ δέ Ac 18:14; Dg 2:8.
    ⓒ Somet. the combination μὲν … δέ does not emphasize a contrast, but separates one thought from another in a series, so that they may be easily distinguished: πρῶτον μὲν … ἔπειτα δέ in the first place … then Hb 7:2. ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δέ the one … the other Mt 13:8, 23 (cp. Lucian, Hermot. 66 ὁ μὲν ἑπτά, ὁ δὲ πέντε, ὁ δὲ τριάκοντα; Just., D. 35, 6; 39, 2; cp. TestAbr A 10 p. 87, 21 [Stone p. 22] ἄλλους μὲν … ἑτέρους); Ro 9:21. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δέ the one … the other Mt 21:35; 25:15; Lk 23:33; Ac 27:44; Ro 14:5; 1 Cor 11:21; Jd 22. ἃ μὲν … ἃ δέ some … others 2 Ti 2:20. ὁ μὲν … ὁ δέ the one … the other, but pl. some … others Ac 14:4; 17:32; Gal 4:23; Eph 4:11; Phil 1:16; Dg 2:2f. ἕκαστος …, ὁ μὲν οὕτως ὁ δὲ οὕτως each one …, one in one way, one in another 1 Cor 7:7. ὸ̔ς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα, ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν the one is confident about eating anything, but the weak person Ro 14:2. τινὲς μὲν … τινὲς δέ some … but still others Phil 1:15. ἄλλη μὲν …, ἄλλη δὲ …, ἄλλη δέ … 1 Cor 15:39. ἑτέρα μὲν …, ἑτέρα δέ vs. 40. οἱ μὲν …, ἄλλοι δὲ …, ἕτεροι δέ Mt 16:14. ᾧ μὲν γὰρ …, ἄλλῳ δὲ …, ἑτέρῳ 1 Cor 12:8ff. ἃ μὲν …, ἄλλα δὲ …, ἄλλα δέ Mt 13:4ff. τοῦτο μὲν …, τοῦτο δέ in part … in part (Hdt. 3, 106; Isocr. 4, 21; 22) Hb 10:33 (μέν followed by more than one δέ: two, Libanius, Or. 18, p. 251, 3f; Or. 59 p. 240, 13; four, Or. 64 p. 469, 14).
    ② marker of contrast or continuation without express correlation and frequently in anacolutha
    ⓐ when the contrast can be supplied fr. the context, and therefore can be omitted as obvious: λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας (sc. ὄντα δὲ ἄλογα or someth. sim.) they have the reputation of being wise (but are foolish) Col 2:23 (difft. BHollenbach, NTS 25, ’79, 254–61: a subordinate clause embedded in its main clause). τὰ μὲν σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη ἐν ὑμῖν the signs that mark a true apostle were performed among you (but you paid no attention) 2 Cor 12:12. ἤδη μὲν οὖν ἥττημα indeed it is already a defeat for you (but you make it still worse) 1 Cor 6:7.—μέν serves to emphasize the subject in clauses which contain a report made by the speaker’s personal state of being, esp. intellectual or emotional; so ἐγὼ μ. Παῦλος 1 Th 2:18. ἡ μ. εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας Ro 10:1.
    ⓑ Somet. the contrast is actually expressed, but not in adversative form (Diod S 12, 70, 6 Ἀθηναῖοι μὲν οὖν ἐπιβουλεύσαντες τοῖς Βοιωτοῖς τοιαύτῃ συμφορᾷ περιέπεσον=so the Ath., one can see, after plotting against the B., had their fortunes reversed in such a disaster; Polyaenus with dramatic effect: 4, 3, 20 οἱ μὲν …, Ἀλέξανδρος … ; 2, 3, 2) τότε μὲν … ἔπειτα (here we expect δέ) J 11:6f. ἐφʼ ὅσον μὲν οὖν εἰμι ἐγὼ ἐθνῶν ἀπόστολος in so far, then, as I am an apostle to the nations Ro 11:13 (the contrast follows in vs. 14); cp. 7:12 and 13ff.
    ⓒ We notice anacoluthon in enumerations, either if they are broken off or if they are continued in some manner that is irregular in form: πρῶτον μέν in the first place Ro 1:8; 3:2; 1 Cor 11:18. πρῶτον μὲν … ἔπειτα (X., Cyr. 7, 5, 1) Js 3:17. In the prologue to Ac (s. λόγος 1b) the clause w. δέ corresponding to τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον 1:1 (Diod S 11, 1, 1 ῾Η μὲν οὖν πρὸ ταύτης βίβλος … τὸ τέλος ἔσχε τῶν πράξεων … ἐν ταύτῃ δέ … The preceding book … contained … ; in this one, on the other hand …) may have been omitted through editorial activity acc. to Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; 397.
    ⓓ μέν followed by καί is not customary (Ael. Aristid. 31, 19 K.=11 p. 133 D.; IAsMinSW 325, 10ff μὲν … καί; POxy 1153, 14 [I A.D.] two armbands ἓν μὲν σανδύκινον καὶ ἓν πορφυροῦν; TestJob 40:7f; ApcMos 15) Mk 4:4ff; Lk 8:5ff; MPol 2:4.
    ⓔ μὲν οὖν denotes continuation (TestJob 40:14; Just., A I, 7, 3; s. B-D-F §451, 1; Kühner-G. II 157f, but note Denniston’s caution, p. 473, n. 1; Mayser II/3, 152f; Rob. 1151; 1191) so, then Lk 3:18. Esp. in Ac: 1:6, 18; 2:41; 5:41; 8:25; 9:31; 11:19; 13:4; 14:3 (DSharp, ET 44, ’33, 528); 15:3, 30; 16:5; 17:12, 17, 30; 19:32; 23:18, 22, 31; 25:4; 26:4, 9; 28:5. Also 1 Cor 6:4 (B-D-F §450, 4); Hb 9:1; Papias (2:16). εἰ μὲν οὖν now if Hb 7:11; 8:4.
    ⓕ μενοῦν, οὐμενοῦν, and μενοῦνγε s. under these entries.—JLee, Some Features of the Speech of Jesus in Mark’s Gospel: NovT 27, ’85, 1–26.—DELG s.v. 1 μήν. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέν

  • 8 κρίνω

    κρίνω (s. κρίμα; Hom.+) fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρίκει (on the lack of augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; W-S. §12, 4; Mlt-H. 190; ἐκεκρίκει Just., D. 102, 2). Pass.: impf. ἐκρινόμην; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην; pf. κέκριμαι. Primary mng.: ‘to set apart so as to distinguish, separate’, then by transference
    ① to make a selection, select, prefer (Aeschyl., Suppl. 39 τὶ; Pla., Rep. 3, 399e κρίνειν τινὰ πρό τινος ‘prefer someone to someone’, cp. Phlb. 57e; Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 3 κ. τί τινι=select someth. because of someth. [a place because of its size]; κ. τὸ πρακτέον καὶ μὴ πρακτέον Did., Gen. 27, 3) ὸ̔ς μὲν γὰρ κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν the one prefers one day to another Ro 14:5a. In the other half of the sentence ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, κ. prob. has the sense recognize, approve (X., Hell. 1, 7, 34 ἔκριναν τὴν τῆς βουλῆς γνώμην) the other holds every day in esteem vs. 5b. Closely associated is mng.
    ② to pass judgment upon (and thereby seek to influence) the lives and actions of other people
    ⓐ judge, pass judgment upon, express an opinion about Mt 7:1a, 2a; Lk 6:37a; 1 Cl 13:2; Pol 2:3 (Sextus 183 ὁ κρίνων ἄνθρωπον κρίνεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ). κ. δικαίως D 4:3; B 19:11. κ. κατʼ ὄψιν by the outward appearance J 7:24a. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 8:15. τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κ. pass a right judgment 7:24b (on the expr. cp. Dt 16:18). This is perh. the place for 1 Pt 4:6 ἵνα κριθῶσιν κατὰ ἀνθρ. (s. ESelwyn, comm. ad loc. ref. to Lghtf.; cp. Wsd 3:4).
    ⓑ esp. pass an unfavorable judgment upon, criticize, find fault with, condemn (Epict. 2, 21, 11) Ro 2:1abc, 3; 14:3f, 10, 13a (a play on words, w. κρίνειν used in two different mngs. in the same vs.; s. 4 below on vs. 13b); Col 2:16; Js 4:11, 12; D 11:12. μή τι κρίνετε do not pronounce judgment on anything 1 Cor 4:5. ἱνατί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως; why is my freedom (of action) to be unfavorably judged by another person’s scruples? 1 Cor 10:29. μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτόν happy is the one who finds no fault w. himself Ro 14:22.—Also of a human judgment directed against God ὅπως ἂν νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε that you may win when you are judged Ro 3:4 (OMichel in KEK prefers active sense); 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6).
    ③ to make a judgment based on taking various factors into account, judge, think, consider, look upon w. double acc. of the obj. and the predicate (Soph., Oed. R. 34; Pla., Rep. 9, 578b and s. Cebes 39, 4; 3 Macc 2:33; Just., D. 112, 1) οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτούς you do not consider yourselves worthy Ac 13:46 (Jos., Ant. 6, 159 ὸ̔ν αὐτὸς τ. βασιλείας ἄξιον ἔκρινεν; EpArist 98); cp. PtK 3 p. 15, 17. τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε you considered their shortcomings as your own 1 Cl 2:6. Pass. (Thu. 2, 40, 3; Jos., Ant. 4, 193) τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; why do you think it is incredible? Ac 26:8 (Jos., Ant. 18, 76 ἄπιστα αὐτὰ κρίνειν).—Foll. by acc. w. inf. (Pla., Gorg., 452c, Rep. 9, 578b; X., An. 1, 9, 5; 28) κεκρίκατέ με πιστὴν … εἶναι Ac 16:15.—W. inf. foll. κρίνω μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς κτλ. 15:19.—Foll. by τοῦτο ὅτι 2 Cor 5:14.—W. direct quest. foll. ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε judge, decide for yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.—W. indirect quest. foll. (Thu. 4, 130, 7 κρίναντες ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, εἰ … ; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 5) εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε decide whether it is right to obey you rather than God Ac 4:19.—κρίνατε ὑμεῖς ὅ φημι pass your own judgment on what I say 1 Cor 10:15.—ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας you have judged rightly Lk 7:43.
    ④ to come to a conclusion after a cognitive process, reach a decision, decide, propose, intend (Isocr. 4, 46; Polyb. 3, 6, 7; 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; Epict. 2, 15, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 14, 118 §497 ὅταν οἱ θεοὶ κρίνωσιν; LXX) τί οὖν θέλετε, κρίνατε (restored) so decide now what you wish (to be done); w. inf. (Diod S 4, 33, 10; 17, 95, 1; UPZ 42, 37 [162 B.C.]; PTebt 55, 4 [II B.C.] ἔκρινα γράψαι; PLond III, 897, 11 p. 207 [84 A.D.]; 1 Macc 11:33; 3 Macc 1:6; Jdth 11:13; Wsd 8:9; Jos., Ant.7, 33; 12, 403; 13, 188; Did., Gen. 179, 7) Ac 3:13; 20:16; 25:25; 1 Cor 2:2; 5:3; Tit 3:12. W. τοῦ and inf. (B-D-F §397, 2) ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς Ac 27:1. ἐπεὶ ἤδη σεαυτῷ κέκρικας τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς ἐντολὰς ταύτας ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπου φυλαχθῆναι since you have already decided in your own mind that these commandments cannot be kept by anyone Hm 12, 3, 6.—W. acc. and inf. (2 Macc 11:25, 36; 3 Macc 6:30; TestSol 10:8; SibOr 3, 127; Just., D. 102, 2) Ac 21:25 (even in the substantially different rdgs.). τοῦτο κέκρικεν …, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον he has determined this, namely to keep his fiancée (pure and undefiled) 1 Cor 7:37 (s. s.v. γαμίζω 2; Diod S 4, 73, 2 of a father: κρίναι ταύτην [i.e. his daughter] παρθένον διαφυλάττειν). τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα but rather decide this, (namely) to give no offense Ro 14:13b. ἔκρινα ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο, τὸ … ἐλθεῖν 2 Cor 2:1. τὰ δόγματα τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τ. ἀποστόλων Ac 16:4 (cp. Polyb. 5, 52, 6 πράξας τὸ κριθέν; Epict. 2, 15, 7 τοῖς κριθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν δεῖ).
    ⑤ to engage in a judicial process, judge, decide, hale before a court, condemn, also hand over for judicial punishment, freq. as a legal t.t. (in a forensic sense Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ of a human court
    α. act. and pass. abs. Ac 13:27. W. adv. GPt 3:7. κ. τινά: κατὰ τὸν νόμον J 18:31; Ac 23:3; 24:6 v.l. οὐδὲ ἐγὼ κρίνω ὑμᾶς GJs 16:3. Of the right of the apostle and the church to judge believers 1 Cor 5:12ab. μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον; does our law (personified) judge a person? J 7:51 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 50 §205 certain senators desire that before Mark Antony is declared a public enemy he should be brought to trial, ὡς οὐ πάτριον σφίσιν ἀκρίτου καταδικάζειν ‘on the ground that it was not their ancestral custom to condemn someone without a hearing’). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε I will punish you on the basis of your own statement Lk 19:22. Pass. Ac 25:10. κρίνεσθαι ἐπί τινι be on trial because of a thing 26:6 (Appian, Basil. 12 κρινόμενος ἐπὶ τῷδε=be brought to trial because of this thing; likew. Iber. 55 §233; Ath. 2, 3; of God ApcrEzk Fgm. d). Also περί τινος (Diod S 12, 30, 5) 23:6; 25:20; w. addition of ἐπί w. gen. of the court of judicature before someone (schol. on Hes., Op. 9) 24:21; 25:9; D 11:11.—τί δὲ καὶ ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον; Lk 12:57, which leads over into the sphere of jurisprudence (vs. 58), means: why cannot you yourselves decide what is right? (cp. the prayer for vengeance fr. Amorgos [BCH 25, 1901 p. 416; Dssm., LO 94=LAE 118] ἐπάκουσον, θεά, καὶ κρῖναι τὸ δίκαιον; cp. Appian, Mithrid. 89 §403 κρίνειν τὴν μάχην=decide the battle; Just., A II, 15, 5).
    β. mid. and pass.: ‘dispute, quarrel, debate’, also go to law (so Thu. 4, 122, 4 δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι; Hos 2:4 al. in LXX; TestSol 4:4ff D; Mel., P. 101, 773) τινί with someone (Job 9:3; 13:19) Mt 5:40; B 6:1 (Is 50:8); μετά τινος (Vi. Aesopi W 76 κριθῆναί με μετὰ τῆς κυρίας μου ἐπὶ σοί=I am pleading my case with my mistress before you; Eccl 6:10) 1 Cor 6:6. ἐπί τινος before someone (as judge) vs. 1 (on the beginning of 1 Cor 6 cp. the decree of Alexander to the Greeks in Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21: βούλομαι δὲ μὴ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς κρίνειν ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον, οὐδὲ ἐφʼ οὗ βούλεσθε=it is my wish [will] that you are not to go to law among yourselves, no matter what any of you may have against another, nor before anyone you wish).
    ⓑ of the divine tribunal
    α. occupied by God or Christ: abs. administer justice, judge J 5:30; 8:16, 50; cp. vs. 26; Rv 6:10; B 5:7. Pass. be judged Mt 7:1b, 2b; Lk 6:37b; Rv 11:18.—W. acc. foll. (PGM 4, 1013 of Horus ὁ κρίνων τὰ πάντα) J 5:22; 8:15b. τοὺς ἔξω 1 Cor 5:13. ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς judge the living and the dead 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; B 7:2. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων Ro 2:16. τὸν κόσμον B 4:12 (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 10 [Stone p. 32]; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 8 Tdf.). τὴν οἰκουμένην Ac 17:31; AcPl Ha 9, 29. κ. κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον judge each one by what that person does 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Rv 20:13. ἐκρίθησαν οἱ νεκροὶ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν the dead were judged by what was written in the books (of life and of death), in accordance w. their deeds vs. 12; δικαίως κ. judge uprightly (Sotades [280 B.C.] Fgm. 11, 2 Diehl2 II 6 p. 191 [in Stob. 4, 34, 8 vol. V p. 826, 5=Coll. Alex. p. 243] ὁ παντογενὴς … οὐ κρίνει δικαίως) 1 Pt 2:23; B 19:11. Also ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ Rv 19:11. διὰ νόμου κρίνεσθαι be judged on the basis of the law Js 2:12.—Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish (opp. σῴζειν as TestJud 24:6; Mel., P. 104, 810; cp. ApcEsdr 1, 11 p. 25, 3 Tdf. ἐμὲ κρῖνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) J 3:17; cp. 18ab; 12:47ab, 48a; cp. 48b; Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14); Dg 7:5f (opp. ἀγαπᾶν). διὰ νόμου κ. punish on the basis of the law Ro 2:12.—3:6f; 1 Cor 11:31f (here of the temporal punishment which God brings upon sinners); 2 Th 2:12; Hb 10:30 (κρινεῖ κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ the Lord will judge = punish his people is derived fr. Dt 32:36=Ps 134:14, where the judgment of God is spoken of, resulting in the vindication of the innocent [the thought prominent in the two OT pass.] and the punishment of the guilty [the thought prominent in the Hb pass.]); 13:4; Js 5:9; for 1 Pt 4:6 s. 2a above; Rv 18:8; 19:2; B 15:5.—W. the punishment given κ. διὰ πυρός 1 Cl 11:1; διὰ τῶν μαστίγων 17:5. κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ already condemned to death B 10:5. Also εἰς θάνατον condemned to death Hs 9, 18, 2. οἱ κρινόμενοι ἀσεβεῖς the godless, who are condemned 2 Cl 18:1. Of the devil ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται J 16:11.—ταῦτα ἔκρινας you have imposed these punishments Rv 16:5.—On κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα 18:20 s. κρίμα 4.
    β. occupied by those who have been divinely commissioned to judge: the 12 apostles judge the 12 tribes Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30 (PBatiffol, RB n.s. 9, 1912, 541–43. But here κ. could have the broader sense rule; cp. 4 Km 15:5; Ps 2:10; 1 Macc 9:73; PsSol 17:29). κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία … σέ the one who is physically uncircumcised will sit in judgment upon you Ro 2:27. οἱ ἅγιοι as judges of the cosmos 1 Cor 6:2ab (κρίνεσθαι ἐν: Diod S 19, 51, 4.—On the saints as co-rulers with God cp. Epict., Ench. 15; Sallust. 21 p. 36, 14) as well as of the angels vs. 3 (cp. Da 7:22).
    ⑥ to ensure justice for someone, see to it that justice is done (LXX) τινί to someone 1 Cl 8:4 (Is 1:17).—B. 1428. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κρίνω

  • 9 ὄνομα

    ὄνομα, ατος, τό (Hom.+).
    ① proper name of an entity, name
    ⓐ gener. τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2; cp. Rv 21:14. τῶν παρθένων τὰ ὀν. Hs 9, 15, 1. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρός Lk 1:59. ὄν. μοι, sc. ἐστίν, my name is (Od. 9, 366) Mk 5:9b. τί ὄν. σοι; what is your name? vs. 9a; w. copula Lk 8:30.—The expressions ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν., οὗ τὸ ὄν., καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ὄν. αὐτῷ (parenthetic) are almost always without the copula (B-D-F §128, 3; Rob. 395): ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν. (Sb 7573, 13 [116 A.D.]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.; Just., A I, 53, 8 ᾧ ὄν. Λώτ) Lk 1:26, 27a; 2:25; 8:41; 24:13, 18 v.l.; Ac 13:6.—οὗ τὸ ὄν. (without a verb as BGU 344, 1) Mk 14:32. Cp. ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς Phil 4:3 (ὧν τὰ ὀν. is a formula [Dssm., LO 95=LAE 121]. S. esp. BGU 432 II, 3 ὧν τὰ ὀν. τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται).—καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτῆς Lk 1:5b. καὶ τὸ ὄν. τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ vs. 27b.—ὄν. αὐτῷ (Demosth. 32, 11 Ἀριστοφῶν ὄνομʼ αὐτῷ; Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4; Aelian, NA 8, 2 γυνὴ … Ἡρακληὶς ὄν. αὐτῇ; LXX) J 1:6; 3:1. ὁ καθήμενος ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ ἵππου), ὄν. αὐτῷ (ὁ) θάνατος Rv 6:8; cp. 9:11a.—W. the copula ἦν δὲ ὄν. τῷ δούλῳ Μάλχος J 18:10 (POxy 465, 12 ὁ δὲ κραταιὸς αὐτοῦ, ὄν. αὐτῷ ἐστιν Νεβύ, μηνύει; Jos., Ant. 19, 332). ἄγγελος …, οὗ τὸ ὄν. ἐστιν Θεγρί Hv 4, 2, 4.—The dat. is quite freq. ὀνόματι named, by name (X., Hell. 1, 6, 29 Σάμιος ὀνόματι Ἱππεύς; Tob 6:11 BA; 4 Macc 5:4; Just., D. 85, 6; 115, 3; B-D-F §160; 197; Rob. 487) ἄνθρωπον ὀν. Σίμωνα Mt 27:32; cp. Mk 5:22; Lk 1:5a; 5:27; 10:38; 16:20; 23:50; 24:18; Ac 5:1, 34; 8:9; 9:10–12, 33, 36; 10:1; 11:28; 12:13; 16:1, 14; 17:34; 18:2, 7, 24; 19:24; 20:9; 21:10; 27:1; 28:7; MPol 4. Also the acc. τοὔνομα (on the crasis s. B-D-F §18; Mlt-H. 63; FPreisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Mus. zu Kairo [1911] 2, 6 γυνὴ Ταμοῦνις τοὔνομα; Diod S 2, 45, 4 πόλιν τοὔνομα Θ.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 68; Jos., Ant. 7, 344, Vi. 382) named, by name (the acc. as X. et al., also 2 Macc 12:13; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac. υἱὸν ὄ. Δάν.—B-D-F §160; Rob. 487) Mt 27:57. (Cp. ὄν. gener. as ‘mode of expression’ εἰ καὶ διάφορα ὀνόματα ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ … οἰκείαν … δέχεται τὴν νόησιν although there are various ways of expressing it, it nevertheless has a definite sense Did., Gen. 86, 22 [of various metaphors and images for the soul].)
    ⓑ used w. verbs
    α. as their obj.: ὄν. ἔχειν Did., Gen. 29, 6 bear the name or as name, be named ὄν. ἔχει Ἀπολλύων Rv 9:11b (in this case the name Ἀ. stands independently in the nom.; B-D-F §143; Rob. 458). καλεῖν τὸ ὄν. τινος w. the name foll. in the acc. (after the Hb.; B-D-F §157, 2; Rob. 459) καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν you are to name him Jesus Mt 1:21; Lk 1:31.—Mt 1:25. καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰωάννην Lk 1:13. καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). διδόναι GJs 6:2. Pass. w. the name in the nom. (cp. GrBar 6:10 Φοῖνιξ καλεῖται τὸ ὄν. μου) ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦς Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 19:13. Also τὸ ὄν. τοῦ ἀστέρος λέγεται ὁ ῎ Αψινθος Rv 8:11.—ἐπιθεῖναι ὄν. τινι w. acc. of the name Mk 3:16f; cp. 12:8f; κληρονομεῖν ὄν. receive a name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2. κληροῦσθαι τὸ αὐτὸ ὄν. obtain the same name (s. κληρόω 2) MPol 6:2.—τὰ ὀν. ὑμῶν ἐγγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς Lk 10:20.—Rv 13:8; 17:8. ἐξαλείψω τὸ ὄν. αὐτῶν 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14); Rv 3:5a (perh. to be placed in 4 below); s. ἐξαλείφω.
    β. in another way (εἰ δέ τις ὀνόματι καλέσει but if anyone is so named Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 2): ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ who is so named Lk 1:61. ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος a man whose name was Zacchaeus 19:2. καλεῖν τι (i.e. παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος name someone after someone 1:59. Cp. IMg 10:1. This leads to
    ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἐξ ὀνόματος (Ctesias, Ind. p. 105 M.: Diod S 13, 15, 1; 37, 15, 2; Appian, Mithrid. 59, §243, Bell. Civ. 3, 21 §77; 4, 73 §310; PGM 4, 2973; Jos., Ant. 2, 275) by name, individually, one by one (so that no one is lost in the crowd) ἐξ ὀν. πάντας ζήτει IPol 4:2. ἀσπάζομαι πάντας ἐξ ὀνόματος 8:2. πάντες ἐξ ὀν. συνέρχεσθε (parallel to κατʼ ἄνδρα) IEph 20:2.—κατʼ ὄν. by name, individually (Diod S 16, 44, 2; Gen 25:13; EpArist 247; Jos., Bell. 7, 14) J 10:3 (New Docs 3, 77f; animals called individually by name: Ps.-Aristot., Mirabil. 118.—HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 74). Esp. in greetings (BGU 27, 18 [II A.D.] ἀσπάζομαι πάντας τοὺς φιλοῦντάς σε κατʼ ὄν.; POxy 1070, 46; pap in Dssm., LO 160/1, ln. 14f [LAE 193, ln. 15, note 21]; New Docs 3, 77f) 3J 15; ISm 13:2b. ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατʼ ὄν. staffs, each one inscribed with the name of a tribe 1 Cl 43:2b.
    ⓓ used in combination with God and Jesus. On the significance of the Divine Name in history of religions s. FGiesebrecht, Die atl. Schätzung des Gottesnamens 1901; Bousset, Rel.3 309ff; ADieterich, Eine Mithrasliturgie 1903, 110ff; FConybeare, JQR 8, 1896; 9, 1897, esp. 9, 581ff; JBoehmer, Das bibl. ‘im Namen’ 1898, BFCT V 6, 1901, 49ff, Studierstube 2, 1904, 324ff; 388ff; 452ff; 516ff; 580ff; BJacob, Im Namen Gottes 1903;WHeitmüller, ‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903; WBrandt, TT 25, 1891, 565ff; 26, 1892, 193ff; 38, 1904, 355ff; RHirzel, Der Name: ASG 36, 2, 1918; Schürer III4 409–11; HObbink, De magische betekenis van den naam inzonderheid in het oude Egypte 1925; OGrether, Name u. Wort Gottes im AT ’34; HHuffman, Name: 1148–52.—The belief in the efficacy of the name is extremely old; its origin goes back to the most ancient times and the most primitive forms of intellectual and religious life. It has exhibited an extraordinary vitality. The period of our lit. also sees—within as well as without the new community of believers—in the name someth. real, a piece of the very nature of the personality whom it designates, expressing the person’s qualities and powers. Accordingly, names, esp. holy names, are revered and used in customary practices and ritual (σέβεσθαι θεῶν ὀνόματα Theoph. Ant., 1, 9 [p. 76, 7]), including magic. In Israelite tradition the greatest reverence was paid to the holy name of God and to its numerous paraphrases or substitutes; the names of angels and patriarchs occupied a secondary place. The syncretistic practices of the period revered the names of gods, daemons, and heroes, or even magic words that made no sense at all, but had a mysterious sound. The Judeo-Christians revere and use the name of God and, of course, the name of Jesus. On magic in Jewish circles, s. Schürer III 342–79; for the NT period in general s. MSmith, Clement of Alexandria and a Secret Gospel of Mark ’73, 195–230.—The names of God and Jesus
    α. in combination w. attributes: διαφορώτερον ὄν. a more excellent name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2 (διάφορος 2). ἅγιον τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Lk 1:49 (cp. Ps 110:9; Lev 18:21; 22:2; PGM 3, 570; 627; 4, 1005; 3071; 5, 77; 13, 561 μέγα κ. ἅγιον). τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 64; τὸ μέγα καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hv 4, 1, 3; 4, 2, 4 (on ἔνδοξον ὄν., cp. EPeterson, Εἷ θεός 1926, 282.—ὄν. μέγα κ. ἅγ. κ. ἔνδ.: PGM 13, 183f; 504f). τὸ μέγα καὶ θαυμαστὸν καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hs 9, 18, 5; τὸ πανάγιον καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. 1 Cl 58:1a; τοῦ παντοκράτορος καὶ ἐνδόξου ὄν. Hv 3, 3, 5; τὸ πανάρετον ὄν. 1 Cl 45:7; τῷ παντοκράτορι καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι 60:4; τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. 58:1b. τὸ ὄν. μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι D 14:3 (cp. Mal 1:14). The words ὄν. θεοπρεπέστατον IMg 1:2 are difficult to interpret (s. Hdb. ad loc.; θεοπρεπής b).
    β. in combination w. verbs: ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. Mt 6:9 (AFridrichsen, Helligt vorde dit naun: DTT 8, 1917, 1–16). Lk 11:2; D 8:2 (ἁγιάζω 3). βλασφημεῖν (q.v. bγ) τὸ ὄν. Rv 13:6; 16:9; pass. βλασφημεῖται τὸ ὄν. (Is 52:5) Ro 2:24; 2 Cl 13:1f, 4; ITr 8:2. βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου bring blasphemy upon the name of the Lord 1 Cl 47:7. πφοσέθηκαν κατὰ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου βλασφημίαν Hs 6, 2, 3; βεβηλοῦν τὸ ὄν. 8, 6, 2 (s. βεβηλόω). ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄν. τ. ἀδελφοῖς μου Hb 2:12 (cp. Ps 21:23). ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄν. μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Ro 9:17 (Ex 9:16). δοξάζειν τὸ ὄν. (σου, τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ θεοῦ etc.) Rv 15:4; 1 Cl 43:6; IPhld 10:1; Hv 2, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3; 4, 1, 3; Hs 9, 18, 5 (s. δοξάζω 1; cp. GJs 7:2; 12:1[w. ref. to name of Mary]). ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ 2 Th 1:12. ἐλπίζειν τῷ ὀν. Mt 12:21 (vv.ll. ἐν or ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.; the pass. on which it is based, Is 42:4, has ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.). ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου (as PsSol 6:1) or αὐτοῦ, σου etc. (w. ref. to God or Christ) call on the name of the Lord Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); 9:14, 21; 22:16; Ro 10:13 (Jo 3:5); 1 Cor 1:2. ψυχὴ ἐπικεκλημένη τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ a person who calls upon his exalted and holy name 1 Cl 64.—Pass. πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄν. μου ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12). τὸ καλὸν ὄν. τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς Js 2:7 (on καλὸν ὄν. cp. Sb 343, 9 and the Pompeian graffito in Dssm., LO 237 [LAE 276]). πάντες οἱ ἐπικαλούμενοι τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ all those who are called by (the Lord’s) name Hs 9, 14, 3; cp. οἱ κεκλημένοι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου those who are called by the name of the Lord 8, 1, 1. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐπʼ αὐτούς be ashamed of the name that is named over them 8, 6, 4. ὁμολογεῖν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ praise his name Hb 13:15 (cp. PsSol 15:2 ἐξομολογήσασθαι τῷ ὀνόματι σου). ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 2 Ti 2:19 (Is 26:13). ψάλλειν τῷ ὀν. σου Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 19:5 (Ex 20:7; Dt 5:11).—Although in the preceding examples the name is oft. practically inseparable fr. the being that bears it, this is perh. even more true of the foll. cases, in which the name appears almost as the representation of the Godhead, as a tangible manifestation of the divine nature (Quint. Smyrn. 9, 465 Polidarius, when healing, calls on οὔνομα πατρὸς ἑοῖο ‘the name of his father’ [Asclepius]; τοσοῦτον … δύναται τὸ ὄ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ κατὰ τῶν δαιμόνων Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 11; Dt 18:7; 3 Km 8:16; Ps 68:37; Zech 13:2 ἐξολεθρεύσω τὰ ὀν. τῶν εἰδώλων; Zeph 1:4; PsSol 7:6; Just., D. 121, 3 ὑποτάσσεσθαι αὐτοῦ ὀν.): the ‘name’ of God is ἀρχέγονον πάσης κτίσεως 1 Cl 59:3. Sim. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ μέγα ἐστὶ καὶ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον βαστάζει Hs 9, 14, 5. λατρεύειν τῷ παναρέτῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ worship the most excellent name (of the Most High) 1 Cl 45:7. ὑπακούειν τῷ παναγίῳ καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ be obedient to his most holy and glorious name 58:1a. ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τῷ παντοκρατορικῷ καὶ παναρέτῳ ὀν. 60:4. κηρύσσειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 5. ἐπιγινώσκειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 9, 16, 7. φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. σου Rv 11:18. φανεροῦν τινι τὸ ὄν. σου J 17:6. γνωρίζειν τινὶ τὸ ὄν. σου vs. 26. πιστεύειν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ believe in the name of (God’s) son 1J 3:23. Also πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. (s. γב below and s. πιστεύω 2aβ).—Of the name borne by followers of Jesus Christ (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 13]): κρατεῖς τὸ ὄν. μου you cling to my name Rv 2:13. The same mng. also holds for the expressions: λαμβάνειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 12, 4; 8; 9, 13, 2a; 7. τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄν. μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν to bear my name before (the) Gentiles Ac 9:15. τὸ ὄν. ἡδέως βαστάζειν bear the name gladly Hs 8, 10, 3; cp. 9, 28, 5b. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ φορεῖν 9, 13, 3; 9, 14, 5f; 9, 15, 2; cp. 9, 13, 2b. Christians receive this name at their baptism: πρὶν φορέσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ νεκρός ἐστιν before a person bears the name of God’s Son (which is given the candidate at baptism), he is dead 9, 16, 3. Of dissemblers and false teachers ὄν. μὲν ἔχουσιν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς πίστεως κενοί εἰσιν they have the (Christian) name, but are devoid of faith 9, 19, 2. Of Christians in appearance only ἐν ὑποκρίσει φέροντες τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου who bear the Lord’s name in pretense Pol 6:3. δόλῳ πονηρῷ τὸ ὄν. περιφέρειν carry the name about in wicked deceit (evidently of wandering preachers) IEph 7:1. τὸ ὄν. ἐπαισχύνονται τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῶν they are ashamed of their Lord’s name Hs 9, 21, 3. More fully: ἐπαισχύνονται τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ φορεῖν 9, 14, 6.
    γ. used w. prepositions
    א. w. διά and the gen. διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου πιστεύειν PtK 3 p. 15 ln. 12; σωθῆναι διὰ τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ἐνδόξου ὀν. be saved through the great and glorious name Hv 4, 2, 4. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ (τοῦ θεοῦ) Hs 9, 12, 5. ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ Ac 10:43 (cp. Just., D. 11, 4 al.). σημεῖα … γίνεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ὀν. … Ἰησοῦ by the power of the name 4:30. Differently παρακαλεῖν τινα διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου appeal to someone by the name (= while calling on the name) of the Lord 1 Cor 1:10.—W. διά and the acc. μισούμενοι … διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου hated on account of my name (i.e., because you bear it) Mt 10:22; 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17 (Just., A I, 4, 2 al.). ποιεῖν τι εἴς τινα διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου J 15:21. ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ your sins are forgiven on account of (Jesus’) name 1J 2:12. βαστάζειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου bear (hardship) for my name’s sake Rv 2:3 (s. βαστάζω 2bβ). πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. (also w. a gen. like αὐτοῦ) Pol 8:2; Hv 3, 2, 1b; Hs 9, 28, 3.
    ב. w. εἰς: somet. evidently as rendering of rabb. לְשֵׁם with regard to, in thinking of δέχεσθαί τινα εἰς ὄν. Ἰ. Χρ. receive someone in deference to Jesus Christ IRo 9:3. δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄν. two or three gathered and thinking of me, i.e., so that I am the reason for their assembling Mt 18:20; but here the other mng. (s. ג below) has had some influence: ‘while naming’ or ‘calling on my name’. τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς ἐνεδείξασθε εἰς τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (i.e. θεοῦ) Hb 6:10 is either the love that you have shown with regard to him, i.e. for his sake, or we have here the frequently attested formula of Hellenistic legal and commercial language (s. Mayser II/2 p. 415; Dssm. B 143ff, NB 25, LO 97f [BS 146f; 197; LAE 121]; Heitmüller, op. cit. 100ff; FPreisigke, Girowesen im griech. Ägypt. 1910, 149ff. On the LXX s. Heitmüller 110f; JPsichari, Essai sur le Grec de la Septante 1908, 202f): εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος to the name=to the account (over which the name stands). Then the deeds of love, although shown to humans, are dedicated to God.—The concept of dedication is also highly significant, in all probability, for the understanding of the expr. βαπτίζειν εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος. Through baptism εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τ. those who are baptized become the possession of and come under the dedicated protection of the one whose name they bear. An additional factor, to a degree, may be the sense of εἰς τὸ ὄν.=‘with mention of the name’ (cp. Herodian 2, 2, 10; 2, 13, 2 ὀμνύναι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος; Cyranides p. 57, 1 εἰς ὄν. τινος; 60, 18=εἰς τὸ ὄν. τ.; 62, 13. Another ex. in Heitmüller 107): Mt 28:19; Ac 8:16; 19:5; D 7:1, (3); 9:5; Hv 3, 7, 3; cp. 1 Cor 1:13, 15. S. βαπτίζω 2c and Silva New, Beginn. I/5, ’33, 121–40.—πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος believe in the name of someone i.e. have confidence that the person’s name (rather in the sense of a title, cp. Phil 2:9) is rightfully borne and encodes what the person really is J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; 1J 5:13.
    ג. with ἐν: ἐν ὀνόματι of God or Jesus means in the great majority of cases with mention of the name, while naming or calling on the name (PsSol 11:8; JosAs 9:1; Just., D. 35, 2 al.; no corresponding use has been found in gener. Gk. lit.; but cp. ἐν ὀν. τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ὑψίστου θεοῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 15, 6.—Heitmüller p. 13ff, esp. 44; 49). In many pass. it seems to be a formula. ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Mk 9:38; 16:17; Lk 9:49. τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. σου the demons are subject to us at the mention of your name 10:17. ποιεῖν τι ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ac 4:7; cp. Col 3:17. Perh. J 10:25 (but s. below). ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ … οὗτος παρέστηκεν ὑγιής Ac 4:10. ὄν. … ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς vs. 12. παραγγέλλω σοι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. 16:18; cp. 2 Th 3:6; IPol 5:1. σοὶ λέγω ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 14:10 D. Peter, in performing a healing, says ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. περιπάτει 3:6 (s. Heitmüller 60). The elders are to anoint the sick w. oil ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου while calling on the name of the Lord Js 5:14.—Of prophets λαλεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. κυρίου 5:10. παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ speak out boldly in proclaiming the name of Jesus Ac 9:27f. βαπτίζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. be baptized or have oneself baptized while naming the name of Jesus Christ Ac 2:38 v.l.; 10:48. At a baptism ἐν ὀν. χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 32. αἰτεῖν τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (=Ἰησοῦ) ask the Father, using my name J 15:16; cp. 14:13, 14; 16:24, 26. W. the latter pass. belongs vs. 23 (ὁ πατὴρ) δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (the Father) will give you, when you mention my name. τὸ πνεῦμα ὸ̔ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου the Spirit, whom the Father will send when my name is used 14:26. To thank God ἐν ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. while naming the name of Jesus Christ Eph 5:20. ἵνα ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ that when the name of Jesus is mentioned every knee should bow Phil 2:10. χαίρετε, υἱοί, ἐν ὀν. κυρίου greetings, my sons, as we call on the Lord’s name 1:1. ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου whoever comes, naming the Lord’s name (in order thereby to give evidence of being a Christian) D 12:1. ἀσπάζεσθαι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. greet, while naming the name of J. Chr. w. acc. of pers. or thing greeted IRo ins; ISm 12:2. Receive a congregation ἐν ὀν. θεοῦ IEph 1:3. συναχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. meet and call on the name of the Lord Jesus=as a Christian congregation 1 Cor 5:4. μόνον ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. only (it is to be) while calling on the name of J. Chr. ISm 4:2.—Not far removed fr. these are the places where we render ἐν τῷ ὀν. with through or by the name (s. ἐν 4c); the effect brought about by the name is caused by its utterance ἀπελούσασθε, ἡγιάσθητε, ἐδικαιώθητε ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. 1 Cor 6:11. ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ (=Ἰησοῦ) J 20:31. τηρεῖν τινα ἐν τῷ ὀν. (θεοῦ) 17:11f.—ἐν τῷ ὀν. at the command (of), commissioned by ἔργα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός J 10:25 (but s. above). ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός 5:43a; in contrast ἔρχ. ἐν τῷ ὀν. τῷ ἰδίῳ vs. 43b. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου 12:13 (Ps 117:26). The Ps-passage prob. has the same sense (despite Heitmüller 53f) in Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38.—OMerlier, Ὄνομα et ἐν ὀνόματι dans le quatr. Év.: RevÉtGr 47, ’34, 180–204; RBratcher, BT 14, ’63, 72–80.
    ד. w. ἕνεκα (and the other forms of this word; s. ἕνεκα 1): of persecutions for one’s Christian faith ἀπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. μου Lk 21:12. πάσχειν or ὑποφέρειν εἵνεκα τοῦ ὀνόματος Hv 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1; Hs 9, 28, 5. ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. (τοῦ) κυρίου v 3, 5, 2; Hs 9, 28, 6. ἀφιέναι οἰκίας … ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀν. for my name’s sake Mt 19:29. ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. σου you created all things for your name’s sake, i.e. that God’s name might be praised for the benefits which the works of creation bring to humankind D 10:3.
    ה. w. ἐπί and the dat.: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τινος when someone’s name is mentioned or called upon, or mentioning someone’s name (LXX; En 10:2; Just., D. 39, 6; Ath. 23, 1; s. Heitmüller 19ff; 43ff; s. also 47ff; 52ff; 87ff) in the NT only of the name of Jesus, and only in the synoptics and Ac. ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου they will come using my name Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν 24:47. λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ to speak using this name Ac 4:17; 5:40. διδάσκειν 4:18; 5:28. ποιεῖν δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου Mk 9:39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. σου ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἐπὶ τῷ σῷ ὀν. τὰς θεραπείας ἐπετέλουν GJs 20:2 (codd.). Of the (spiritual) temple of God: οἰκοδομηθήσεται ναὸς θεοῦ ἐνδόξως ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. κυρίου the temple of God will be gloriously built with the use of the Lord’s name 16:6f, 8 (quot. of uncertain orig.). βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. Ac 2:38. Baptism is also referred to in καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ receive a name when the name of God’s son is named Hs 9, 17, 4. The words δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου can also be classed here receive (a child) when my name is confessed, when I am called upon Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (s. Heitmüller 64); but s. also 3 below.—ἐπί w. acc.: πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. have confidence in (the Lord’s) most sacred and majestic name 1 Cl 58:1b; ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὄν. hope in the name (of the Lord) 16:8b.
    ו. w. περί and the gen.: εὐαγγελίζεσθαι περὶ τοῦ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. bring the good news about the name of J. Chr. Ac 8:12.—(W. acc.: ἔχομεν δέος τὸ ὄ. τοῦ θεοῦ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 48, 34).
    ז. w. πρός and acc.: πρὸς τὸ ὄν. Ἰησοῦ … πολλὰ ἐναντία πρᾶξαι do many things in opposing the name of Jesus Ac 26:9.
    ח. w. ὑπέρ and gen.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. (Ἰησοῦ) ἀτιμασθῆναι Ac 5:41. πάσχειν 9:16; Hs 9, 28, 2. Cp. Ac 15:26; 21:13. The activity of the apostles takes place ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ to the honor of (Jesus’) name Ro 1:5. Cp. 3J 7. Of thankful praying at the Lord’s Supper εὐχαριστοῦμεν σοι … ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀν. σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν we thank you … for your holy name, which you caused to dwell in our hearts D 10:2.
    δ. ὄν. w. ref. to God or Christ not infreq. stands quite alone, simply the Name: Ac 5:41; Phil 2:9 (cp. Diod S 3, 61, 6); 3J 7; 2 Cl 13:1, 4; IEph 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 10:1; Hv 3, 2, 1; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 13, 2; 9, 28, 3; 5.
    ② a person (Phalaris, Ep. 128; POxy 1188, 8 [13 A.D.]; BGU 113, 11; Jos., Ant. 14, 22; other exx. in Dssm., NB 24f [BS 196f]; LXX) τὸ ποθητόν μοι ὄν. my dear friend: Alce ISm 13:2; IPol 8:3; Crocus IRo 10:1. Pl. (PThéad 41, 10; PSI 27, 22; Num 1:18 al.) people Ac 1:15; Rv 3:4. ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων 11:13 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 50, 72 K.=26 p. 523 D.: ὀνόματα δέκα ἀνδρῶν). This is prob. the place for περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου about teaching and persons and (the) law Ac 18:15.
    ③ the classification under which one belongs, noted by a name or category, title, category (cp. Cass. Dio 38, 44; 42, 24 καὶ ὅτι πολλῷ πλείω ἔν τε τῷ σχήματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ τῆς στρατηγίας ὢν καταπράξειν ἤλπιζε=he hoped to effect much more by taking advantage of his praetorial apparel and title; ins: Sb 7541, 5 [II A.D.] Νύμφη ὄνομʼ ἐστί σοι; POxy 37 I, 17 [49 A.D.] βούλεται ὀνόματι ἐλευθέρου τὸ σωμάτιον ἀπενέγκασθαι=she claims to have carried off the infant on the basis of its being free-born; Jos., Ant. 12, 154 φερνῆς ὀνόματι; 11, 40; Just., A II, 6, 4 καὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ σωτῆρος ὄνομα. Other exx. in Heitmüller 50); the possibility of understanding ὄν. as category made it easier for Greeks to take over rabb. לְשֵׁם (s. 1dγב above) in the sense with regard to a particular characteristic, then simply with regard to, for the sake of ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄν. προφήτου whoever receives a prophet within the category ‘prophet’, i.e. because he is a prophet, as a prophet Mt 10:41a; cp. vss. 41b, 42.—ὸ̔ς ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐν ὀνόματι, ὄτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε whoever gives you a drink under the category that you belong to Christ, i.e. in your capacity as a follower of Christ Mk 9:41. εἰ ὀνειδίζεσθε ἐν ὀν. Χριστοῦ if you are reviled for the sake of Christ 1 Pt 4:14. δοξαζέτω τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ let the person praise God in this capacity (=ὡς Χριστιανός) vs. 16. δέδεμαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. I am imprisoned for the sake of the Name IEph 3:1.—δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου for my (name’s) sake Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (cp. Heitmüller 113. But s. 1dγה above).
    ④ recognition accorded a person on the basis of performance, (well-known) name, reputation, fame (Hom. et al.; 1 Ch 14:17; 1 Macc 8:12) φανερὸν ἐγένετο τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ his fame was widespread Mk 6:14. ὄν. ἔχειν (Pla., Apol. 38c, Ep. 2, 312c) w. ὅτι foll. have the reputation of Rv 3:1 perh. also 3:5 (s. 1bα; JFuller, JETS 26, ’83, 297–306).
    ⑤ name in terms of office held, office (POxy 58, 6) στασιαζουσῶν τ. φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη when the tribes were quarreling as to which one of them was to be adorned with that glorious office 1 Cl 43:2. τὸ ὄν. τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς the office of supervision 44:1.—B. 1263f. OEANE IV 91–96 on Mesopotamian practices. Schmidt, Syn. I 113–24. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὄνομα

  • 10 ἄν

    1
    I. ἄν (after relatives ἐάν [q.v.] is oft. used for ἄν, but the mss. vary greatly, s. B-D-F §107; 377; Mlt. 42ff, 165ff; Mayser 152f; Crönert 130f; Thackeray 67; Dssm., NB 30ff [BS 202ff]). A particle peculiar to Gk. (Hom.+) denoting aspect of contingency, incapable of translation by a single English word; it denotes that the action of the verb is dependent on some circumstance or condition; the effect of ἄν upon the meaning of its clause depends on the mood and tense/aspect of the verb w. which it is used. The NT use of ἄν corresponds in the main to older Gk., although the rich variety of its employment is limited, as is generally the case in later Greek. In certain constructions (s. aβ) an aspect of certainty is indicated, suggesting the gloss would. In most other instances aspects of varying possibility or conditionality find expression in ways that can be rendered ever, but with other glosses required when ἄν is used in conjunction with other particles.
    ⓐ ἄν w. aor. or impf. indic.
    α. denoting repeated action in past time, but only under certain given conditions, esp. after relatives (B-D-F §367; Rob. index): aor. (Gen 30:42; Num 9:17; 1 Km 14:47; Ezk 10:11) ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ, ἐσῴζοντο whoever touched him was cured Mk 6:56. Impf. (Ezk 1:20; 1 Macc 13:20; Tob 7:11) ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο εἰς κώμας wherever he went (as he was accustomed to do—ADebrunner, D. hellenist. Nebensatziterativpräteritum mit ἄν: Glotta 11, 1920, 1–28) into villages Mk 6:56. καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν as anyone was in need Ac 2:45; 4:35. Similarly ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε (v.l. ἀνήγεσθε) 1 Cor 12:2. Cp. also ὅταν 1bγ and δ.
    β. in the apodosis of a contrary to fact (unreal) condition w. εἰ (B-D-F §360; but ἄν is not always used [s. the vv.ll. J 18:36]: §360, 1; Mlt. 199ff; PMelcher, De sermone Epicteteo 1905, 75); it is found
    א. w. impf. (4 Macc 17:7; Bar 3:13; ParJer 5:20; GrBar 6:6; ApcMos 39) οὗτος εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would (now) know (but he does not) Lk 7:39. εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν …, ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith …, you would say 17:6. εἰ ἐπιστεύετε Μωϋσεῖ, ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί J 5:46. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου ἄν ᾔδειτε 8:19; cp. vs. 42; 9:41; 15:19. εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην Gal 1:10; cp. 3:21. εἰ ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν, οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα 1 Cor 11:31. εἰ ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς, οὐδʼ ἂν ἦν ἱερεύς if he were on earth, he would not even be a priest Hb 8:4; cp. 4:8; 8:7; 11:15.
    ב. w. aor., placing the assumption in the past (Gen 30:27; Wsd 11:25; Jdth 11:2; 4 Macc 2:20; TestJob 7:9 al.; ParJer 5:5; GrBar 8:7; PGiss 47, 17) εἰ ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν … μετενόησαν if the miracles had been performed, they would long ago have repented Mt 11:21. εἰ ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν ἐσταύρωσαν 1 Cor 2:8; cp. Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9). εἰ ἐγνώκειτε, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε if you had recognized, you would not have condemned Mt 12:7. εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν if you loved me, you would have rejoiced J 14:28; cp. 11:21. The plpf. for aor. indic. (PGiss 79 II, 6 εἰ δυνατόν μοι ἦν, οὐκ ἂν ὠκνήκειν; BGU 1141, 27f) εἰ ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἄν 1J 2:19; cp. J 11:21 v.l.—In κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα Lk 19:23, ἐλθών functions as an unreal-temporal protasis (B-D-F §360, 2); cp. καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐγὼ ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμόν Mt 25:27. Sim. ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι; where ἐπεί functions as protasis, otherwise (i.e. if the sacrifices had really brought about a lasting atonement) would they not have ceased to offer sacrifices? Hb 10:2.
    ⓑ ἄν w. subjunc. after relatives, the rel. clause forming virtually the protasis of a conditional sentence (B-D-F §380, 1) of the future more vivid or present general type.
    α. w. fut. or impf. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results are thought of as in the future, of single and repeated action (IG XIV, 865 [VI B.C.] ὸ̔ς δʼ ἄν με κλέψῃ, τυφλὸς ἔσται; TestAbr B 4 p. 109, 10 [Stone p. 66]). ὸ̔ς δʼ ἂν ποιήσῃ καὶ διδάξῃ, οὗτος μέγας κληθήσεται but whoever does and teaches=if a person does and teaches it Mt 5:19. ὸ̔ς ἂν ἐσθίῃ …, ἔνοχος ἔσται 1 Cor 11:27. οὓς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) δοκιμάσητε, τούτους πέμψω 16:3—Mt 10:11; 1 Cor 16:2.
    β. w. pres. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results involve repeated action, regardless of the time element: ἃ ἂν ἐκεῖνος ποιῇ, ταῦτα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς ὁμοίως ποιεῖ whatever he does, the Son does likewise J 5:19. ὅπου ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ, ῥήσσει αὐτόν wherever it seizes him Mk 9:18. ὑμῖν ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία …, ὅσους ἂν προσκαλέσηται κύριος Ac 2:39. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) βουληθῇ φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου, ἐχθρὸς τοῦ θεοῦ καθίσταται whoever wishes to be a friend of the world Js 4:4. Cp. ὅπου ἄν 3:4 v.l.—Where ὅς or ὅστις appears w. subj. without ἄν (but cp. IG XII/1, 671 ὸ̔ς ἀνασπαράξῃ τ. τάφον; CPR I, 24, 33; 25, 19; AcThom 93 [Aa II/2, 206], 19; Is 7:2; 31:4), the reading that gives the fut. ind. is prob. the right one: ὅστις τηρήσῃ (v.l.-σει) Js 2:10. ὅσοι (without ἄν PPetr I, 13, 3;5; CPR I, 237, 3; IPergamon 249, 26 ὅσοι … ἐγλίπωσι τὴν πόλιν; Vett. Val. 125, 16): ὅσοι μετανοήσωσιν καὶ καθαρίσωσιν Hs 8, 11, 3 (s. W. and Joly app. for the textual tradition). See Reinhold 108; B-D-F §380, 4.
    ⓒ In temporal clauses ἄν is found w. the subjunct. when an event is to be described which can and will occur, but whose occurrence cannot yet be assumed w. certainty. So
    α. ὅταν (=ὅτε ἄν; s. ὅταν) w. pres. subjunct. to indicate regularly recurring action (Wsd 12:18): ὅταν ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν whenever they eat bread Mt 15:2. ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος whenever he tells a lie J 8:44. ὅταν λέγῃ τις whenever anyone says 1 Cor 3:4.—W. aor. subjunct. to express action in the future which is thought of as already completed (Sir Prol. ln. 22; Tob 8:21) ὅταν ποιήσητε πάντα when you have done Lk 17:10. ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὁ κύριος when the owner has come Mt 21:40; ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐν τῇ δόξῃ Mk 8:38; cp. J 4:25; 16:13; Ac 23:35. ὅταν πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον Hb 1:6.
    β. ἡνίκα ἄν every time that (Ex 1:10; 33:22; 34:24 al.; POxy 104, 26 [96 A.D.]; PTebt 317, 18 [174/75] ἡνίκα ἐὰν εἰς τὸν νόμον παραγένηται). ἡνίκα ἂν (also ἐάν mss.) ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς every time that Moses is read aloud 2 Cor 3:15; cp. vs. 16.
    γ. ὁσάκις ἐάν as often as: ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) πίνητε 1 Cor 11:25. ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) ἐσθίητε vs. 26.
    δ. ὡς ἄν as soon as (PHib 59, 2 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; 66, 4; PEleph 9, 3 [III B.C.]; PParis 46, 18 [143 B.C.]; BGU 1209, 13 [23 B.C.]; Josh 2:14; Jdth 11:15; 1 Macc 15:9): ὡς ἂν πορεύωμαι as soon as I travel Ro 15:24. ὡς ἂν ἔλθω as soon as I come 1 Cor 11:34. ὡς ἂν ἀφίδω τὰ περὶ ἐμέ as soon as I see how it will go with me Phil 2:23. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96]) Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.—ἀφʼ οὗ ἄν after Lk 13:25.—In the case of temporal particles indicating a goal, viz. ἕως οὗ, ἄχρις (οὗ), μέχρις (οὗ), the mss. show considerable variation; the addition of ἄν is prob. correct only in rare cases (see B-D-F §383, 2). Only ἕως ἄν (PPetr II, 40a, 28 [III B.C.] ἕως ἂν ὑγιαίνοντας ὑμᾶς ἴδωμεν; Gen 24:14, 19; 49:10; Ex 23:30 al.) has certain attestation: μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε stay until you go away Mt 10:11. ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 9:27.—Mt 2:13; 5:26. ἕως ἂν λάβῃ Js 5:7 v.l.—ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) ἔλθῃ 1 Cor 11:26. ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) θῇ 15:25; ἄχρις οὗ ἂν ἥξω Rv 2:25 (v.l. ἄχρι). ἄχρις ἂν ἔλθῃ (cp. BGU 830, 13 [I A.D.] ἄχρις ἄν σοι ἔλθω) Gal 3:19 v.l.—πρὶν ἄν: πρὶν ἢ ἂν (vv.ll. πρὶν ἄν, πρὶν ἢ, only πρὶν or ἕως ἂν) ἴδῃ τὸν Χριστόν Lk 2:26 (B-D-F §383, 3).
    ⓓ In purpose clauses the Attic (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I, 1912, 267f; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graec. finalibus 1913, 13ff; 26ff) ὅπως ἄν, esp. freq. in earlier ins (Meisterhans3-Schw. 254), has become quite rare (LXX still rather often: Gen 18:19; 50:20; Ex 33:13; Jer 7:23 al.) ὅπως ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν διαλογισμοί Lk 2:35. ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροί Ac 3:20.—15:17 (Am 9:12 v.l.); Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6); Mt 6:5 v.l.
    ⓔ The opt. w. ἄν in a main clause (potential opt.) has almost wholly disappeared; a rare ex. is εὐξαίμην (v.l. εὐξάμην) ἄν Ac 26:29 in Paul’s speech before Agrippa (literary usage; s. B-D-F §385, 1; also Rob. 938; Themist. 6 p. 80 D.—On the rarity of the potential opt. in pap, LXX, Apost. Fathers see CHarsing, De Optat. in Chartis Aeg. Usu, diss. Bonn 1910, 28; Reinhold 111). Cp.—also in the literary lang. of Lk—direct rhetor. questions (Gen 23:15; Job 19:23; Sir 25:3; 4 Macc 7:22; 14:10 v.l.; TestJob 13:5 τίς ἄν δώῃ 35:5) πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; Ac 8:31. τί ἂν θέλοι οὗτος λέγειν; 17:18. Dg has also preserved the opt. as a mark of elegant style (2:3, 10; 3:3f; 4:5; 7:2f; 8:3). MPol 2:2 has τίς οὐκ ἂν θαυμάσειεν;—More freq. in an indirect question, after an impf. or histor. pres. (B-D-F §386, 1; Rob. 938f) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό what he wanted the child’s name to be Lk 1:62. τίς ἂν εἴη περὶ οὗ λέγει J 13:24. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν which of them was the greatest Lk 9:46; cp. 18:36 v.l. τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ what they should do to Jesus 6:11. τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο Ac 5:24. τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα 10:17. (IMagnMai 215 [I A.D.] ἐπερωτᾷ … τί ἂν ποιήσας … ἀδεῶς διατελοίη; Esth 3:13c πυθομένου δέ μου … πῶς ἂν ἀχθείη τοῦτο.)
    ⓕ The use of ἄν w. inf. and ptc., freq. in earlier Gk., is not found in the NT at all (B-D-F §396); ἵνα μὴ δόξω ὡς ἂν (or ὡσὰν, q.v.) ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς 2 Cor 10:9 is surely to be expl. in such a way that ὡς ἂν=Lat. quasi: I would not want it to appear as if I were frightening you; s. B-D-F §453, 3; Mlt. 167.—On εἰ μήτι ἂν (sc. γένηται) ἐκ συμφώνου except perhaps by agreement 1 Cor 7:5 s. B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169.—M-M.
    2
    II. ἄν for ἐάν is rare in Hellen. Gk. (B-D-F §107; Mlt. 43 n. 2; cp. Hyperid. 4, 5; 5, 15; Teles p. 31, 6; Plut., Mor. 547a; Epict., index Schenkl; pap [Mayser 152]; ins, esp. of the Aegean Sea [Rdm.2 198, 3; s. also SIG index IV 204]; 1 Esdr 2:16; 4 Macc 16:11; Jos., Ant. 4, 70; 219; Test12Patr; Mel. Fgm. 8b 24), but appears J 13:20; 16:23; 20:23; as v.l. 5:19; 9:22; 12:32; 19:12; Ac 9:2; and IMg 10:1.—Mlt. 63, 1.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἄν

  • 11 λαμβάνω

    λαμβάνω (Hom.+) impf. ἐλάμβανον; fut. λήμψομαι (PTurin II, 3, 48; POxy 1664, 12; on the μ s. Mayser 194f; Thackeray 108ff; B-D-F §101; W-S. §5, 30; Mlt-H. 106; 246f; Reinhold 46f; WSchulze, Orthographica 1894.—On the middle s. B-D-F §77); 2 aor. ἔλαβον, impv. λάβε (B-D-F §101 p. 53 s.v. λαμβάνειν; W-S. §6, 7d; Mlt-H. 209 n. 1), impv. 3 pl. λαβέτωσαν (LXX; GJs 4:2); pf. εἴληφα (DRinge, Glotta 62, ’84, 125–28), 2 sing. εἴληφας and εἴληφες Rv 11:17 v.l. (W-S. §13, 16 note; Mlt-H. 221), ptc. εἰληφώς. Pass.: fut. 3 pl. ληφθήσονται Jdth 6:9; aor. εἰλήφθην LXX; pf. 3 sing. εἴληπται; plpf. 3 sg. εἴληπτο (Just., D. 132, 3). For Attic inscriptional forms s. Threatte II 645. In the following divisions, nos. 1–9 focus on an active role, whereas 10 suggests passivity.
    ① to get hold of someth. by laying hands on or grasping someth., directly or indirectly, take, take hold of, grasp, take in hand ἄρτον (Diod S 14, 105, 3 ῥάβδον; TestSol 2:8 D τὴν σφραγῖδα; TestJob 23:10 ψαλίδα) Mt 26:26a; Mk 14:22a; Ac 27:35. τ. βιβλίον (Tob 7:14) Rv 5:8f. τ. κάλαμον Mt 27:30. λαμπάδας take (in hand) (Strattis Com. [V B.C.], Fgm. 37 K. λαβόντες λαμπάδας) 25:1, 3. λαβέτωσαν ἀνὰ λαμπάδα GJs 7:2. μάχαιραν draw the sword (Gen 34:25; Jos., Vi. 173 [cp. JosAs 23:2 τὴν ῥομφαίαν]) Mt 26:52. Abs. λάβετε take (this) Mt 26:26b; Mk 14:22b.— Take hold of (me) GHb 356, 39=ISm 3:2.—ἔλαβέ με ἡ μήτηρ μου τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα ἐν μιᾷ τῶν τριχῶν μου my mother, the Holy Spirit, took me by one of my hairs GHb 20, 63. Ἐλισάβεδ … λαβουμένη (λαβοῦσα codd.) αὐτὸν ἀνέβη ἐν τῇ ὀρεινῇ E. took (John) and went up into the hill-country GJs 22:3. λαβών is somet. used somewhat pleonastically to enliven the narrative, as in Hom. (Od. 24, 398) and dramatists (Soph., Oed. R. 1391 et al.), but also in accord w. Hebr. usage (JViteau, Étude sur le Grec du NT 1893, 191; Dalman, Worte 16ff; Wlh., Einleitung2 1911, 14; B-D-F §419, 1 and 2; s. Rob. 1127; s., e.g., ApcBar 2:1 λαβών με ἤγαγε; Josh 2:4; Horapollo 2, 88 τούτους λαβὼν κατορύττει) Mt 13:31, 33; Mk 9:36; Lk 13:19, 21; J 12:3; Ac 9:25; 16:3; Hs 5, 2, 4. The ptc. can here be rendered by the prep. with (B-D-F §418, 5; Rob. 1127) λαβὼν τὴν σπεῖραν ἔρχεται he came with a detachment J 18:3 (cp. Soph., Trach. 259 στρατὸν λαβὼν ἔρχεται; ApcrEsd 6, 17 p. 31, 24 Tdf. λαβὼν … στρατιὰν ἀγγέλων). λαβὼν τὸ αἷμα … τὸν λαὸν ἐρράντισε with the blood he sprinkled the people Hb 9:19 (cp. ParJer 9:32 λαβόντες τὸν λίθον ἔθηκαν ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα αὐτοῦ ‘they crowned his tomb with a stone’; Mel., P. 14, 88 λαβόντες δὲ τὸ … αἶμα). Different is the periphrastic aor. ptc. use of λ. w. ἔχει: Dg 10:6 ἃ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λαβὼν ἔχει what the pers. has received fr. God (cp. Eur., Bacchae 302 μεταλαβὼν ἔχει; Goodwin §47; Gildersleeve, Syntax §295; Schwyzer I, 812). Freq. parataxis takes the place of the ptc. constr. (B-D-F §419, 5) ἔλαβε τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν (instead of λαβὼν τ. Ἰ. ἐ.) he had Jesus scourged J 19:1. λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον … καὶ βαλεῖν throw the bread Mt 15:26; Mk 7:27. ἔλαβον τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐποίησαν τέσσερα μέρη they divided his garments into four parts J 19:23.—In transf. sense ἀφορμὴν λ. find opportunity Ro 7:8, 11 (s. ἀφορμή); ὑπόδειγμα λ. take as an example Js 5:10; so also λ. alone, λάβωμεν Ἐνώχ 1 Cl 9:3.—Of the cross as a symbol of the martyr’s death take upon oneself Mt 10:38 (cp. Pind., P. 2, 93 [171] λ. ζυγόν). We may class here ἔλαβεν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ he put his clothes on J 13:12 (cp. Hdt. 2, 37; 4, 78; GrBar 9:7 τὸν ὄφιν ἔλαβεν ἔνδυμα). Prob. sim. μορφὴν δούλου λ. put on the form of a slave Phil 2:7.—Of food and drink take (cp. Bel 37 Theod.) Mk 15:23. ὅτε ἔλαβεν τὸ ὄξος J 19:30; λαβὼν τροφὴν ἐνίσχυσεν Ac 9:19; τροφὴν … λα[βεῖν] AcPl Ha 1, 19. (βρέφος) ἔλαβε μασθὸν ἐκ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας (the infant) took the breast of his mother Mary GJs 19:2.—1 Ti 4:4 (s. 10b below) could also belong here.
    ② to take away, remove (τὴν ψυχήν ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 23 Tdf.) with or without the use of force τὰ ἀργύρια take away the silver coins (fr. the temple) Mt 27:6. τὰς ἀσθενείας diseases 8:17. τὸν στέφανον Rv 3:11. τὴν εἰρήνην ἐκ τῆς γῆς remove peace from the earth 6:4 (λ. τι ἐκ as UPZ 125, 13 ὸ̔ εἴληφεν ἐξ οἴκου; 2 Ch 16:2; TestSol 4:15 D; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 12 [Stone p. 70]; Mel., P. 55, 403).
    ③ to take into one’s possession, take, acquire τὶ someth. τὸν χιτῶνα Mt 5:40. οὐδὲ ἕν J 3:27. ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν obtain kingly power for himself Lk 19:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 13, 220). λ. γυναῖκα take a wife (Eur., Alc. 324; X., Cyr. 8, 4, 16; Gen 4:19; 6:2; Tob 1:9; TestSol 26:1; TestJob 45:3; ParJer 8:3; Jos., Ant. 1, 253; Just., D. 116, 3; 141, 4) Mk 12:19–21; 22 v.l.; Lk 20:28–31 (s. also the vv.ll. in 14:20 and 1 Cor 7:28). Of his life, that Jesus voluntarily gives up, in order to take possession of it again on his own authority J 10:18a. [ἀπολείπ]ετε τὸ σκότος, λάβεται τὸ φῶς [abandon] the darkness, seize the light AcPl Ha 8, 32. ἑαυτῷ τ. τιμὴν λ. take the honor upon oneself Hb 5:4.—Lay hands on, seize w. acc. of the pers. who is seized by force (Hom. et al.; LXX; mid. w. gen. Just., A II, 2, 10, D. 105, 3) Mt 21:35, 39; Mk 12:3, 8. Of an evil spirit that seizes the sick man Lk 9:39 (cp. PGM 7, 613 εἴλημπται ὑπὸ τοῦ δαίμονος; TestSol 17:2 εἰ λήμψομαί τινα, εὐθέως ἀναιρῶ αὐτὸν τῷ ξίφει; Jos., Ant. 4, 119 ὅταν ἡμᾶς τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ λάβῃ πνεῦμα; Just., A I, 18, 4 ψυχαῖς ἀποθανόντων λαμβανόμενοι).—Esp. of feelings, emotions seize, come upon τινά someone (Hom. et al.; Ex 15:15; Wsd 11:12; Jos., Ant. 2, 139; 14, 57) ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας amazement seized (them) all Lk 5:26. φόβος 7:16. Sim. πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 Cor 10:13.—Of hunting and fishing: catch (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 9; Aelian, VH 4, 14) οὐδέν Lk 5:5=J 21:6 v.l. Fig. εἴ τις λαμβάνει (ὑμᾶς) if someone puts something over on you, takes advantage of you 2 Cor 11:20 (the exx. cited in Field, Notes, 184f refer to material plunder, whereas Paul appears to point to efforts of his opposition to control the Corinthians’ thinking for their own political purposes; also s. CLattey, JTS 44, ’43, 148); in related vein δόλῳ τινὰ λ. catch someone by a trick 12:16.
    ④ to take payment, receive, accept, of taxes, etc. collect the two-drachma tax Mt 17:24; tithes Hb 7:8f; portion of the fruit as rent Mt 21:34. τὶ ἀπό τινος someth. fr. someone (Plut., Mor. 209d, Aem. Paul. 5, 9) 17:25. παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν λ. ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν collect a share of the fruit fr. the vinedressers Mk 12:2.—τὶ παρά τινος someth. fr. someone (Aristarch. Sam. p. 352, 4; Jos., Ant. 5, 275; Just., D. 22, 11; Tat. 19, 1) οὐ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου τὴν μαρτυρίαν λ. the testimony which I receive is not from a human being or I will not accept mere human testimony (PSI 395, 6 [241 B.C.] σύμβολον λαβὲ παρʼ αὐτῶν=have them give you a receipt) J 5:34; cp. vs. 44; 3:11, 32f.
    ⑤ to include in an experience, take up, receive τινὰ someone εἰς into (Wsd 8:18) lit. εἰς τὸ πλοῖον take someone (up) into the boat J 6:21. εἰς οἰκίαν receive someone into one’s house 2J 10. εἰς τὰ ἴδια into his own home J 19:27. Receive someone in the sense of recognizing the other’s authority J 1:12; 5:43ab; 13:20abcd.—οἱ ὑπηρέται ῥαπίσμασιν αὐτὸν ἔλαβον Mk 14:65 does not mean ‘the servants took him into custody with blows’ (BWeiss, al.), but is a colloquialism (s. B-D-F §198, 3, w. citation of AcJo 90 [Aa II 196, 1] τί εἰ ῥαπίσμασίν μοι ἔλαβες; ‘what if you had laid blows on me?’) the servants treated him to blows (Moffatt: ‘treated him to cuffs and slaps’), or even ‘got’ him w. blows, ‘worked him over’ (perh. a Latinism; Cicero, Tusc. 2, 14, 34 verberibus accipere. B-D-F §5, 3b; s. Rob. 530f); the v.l. ἔβαλον is the result of failure to recognize this rare usage. καλῶς ἔλαβόν σε; have (the young women) treated you well? Hs 9, 11, 8.
    ⑥ to make a choice, choose, select πᾶς ἀρχιερεὺς ἐξ ἀνθρώπων λαμβανόμενος who is chosen fr. among human beings Hb 5:1 (cp. Num 8:6; Am 2:11; Just., D. 130, 3). The emphasis is not on gender but the human status of the chief priest in contrast to that of the unique Messiah vs. 5.
    ⑦ to accept as true, receive τὶ someth. fig. τὰ ῥήματά τινος receive someone’s words (and use them as a guide) J 12:48; 17:8; AcPl Ha 1, 6 (s. καρδία 1bβ). τὸν λόγον receive the teaching Mt 13:20; Mk 4:16 (for μετὰ χαρᾶς λ. cp. PIand 13, 18 ἵνα μετὰ χαρᾶς σε ἀπολάβωμεν).
    ⑧ to enter into a close relationship, receive, make one’s own, apprehend/comprehend mentally or spiritually (Soph., Pla. et al.) of the mystical apprehension of Christ (opp. κατελήμφθην ὑπὸ Χριστοῦ) ἔλαβον (i.e. Χριστόν) I have made (him) my own Phil 3:12.
    ⑨ Special uses: the OT is the source of λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον show partiality/favoritism (s. πρόσωπον 1bα end) Lk 20:21; Gal 2:6; B 19:4; D 4:3.—θάρσος λ. take courage s. θάρσος; πεῖράν τινος λ. try someth. (Pla., Prot. 342a; 348a, Gorg. 448a; X., Cyr. 6, 1, 28; Polyb. 1, 75, 7; 2, 32, 5; 5, 100, 10; Aelian, VH 12, 22; Dt 28:56; Jos., Ant. 8, 166; diff. Dio Chrys. 50, 6) Hb 11:29 (this expr. has a different mng. in vs. 36; s. 10b below).—συμβούλιον λαμβάνειν consult (with someone), lit. ‘take counsel’, is a Latinism (consilium capere; s. B-D-F §5, 3b; Rob. 109) Mt 27:7; 28:12; w. ὅπως foll. 22:15; foll. by κατά τινος against someone and ὅπως 12:14; foll. by κατά τινος and ὥστε 27:1. οὐ λήψῃ βουλὴν πονηρὰν κατὰ τοῦ πλησίον σου D 2:6.
    ⑩ to be a receiver, receive, get, obtain
    ⓐ abs. λαβών (of a hungry hog) when it has received someth. B 10:3. (Opp. αἰτεῖν, as Appian, Fgm. [I p. 532–36 Viereck-R.] 23 αἰτεῖτε καὶ λαμβάνετε; PGM 4, 2172) Mt 7:8; Lk 11:10; J 16:24. (Opp. διδόναι as Thu. 2, 97, 4 λαμβάνειν μᾶλλον ἢ διδόναι; Ael. Aristid. 34 p. 645 D.; Herm. Wr. 5, 10b; Philo, Deus Imm. 57; SibOr 3, 511) Mt 10:8; Ac 20:35; B 14:1; but in D 1:5 λ. rather has the ‘active’ sense accept a donation (as ἵνα λάβῃ ἐξουσίαν TestJob 8:2).
    ⓑ w. acc. of thing τὶ someth. (Da 2:6; OdeSol 11:4 σύνεσιν; TestJob 24:9 τρεῖς ἄρτους al.; ApcEsdr 5:13 p. 30, 11 Tdf. τὴν ψυχήν) τὸ ψωμίον receive the piece of bread J 13:30. ὕδωρ ζωῆς δωρεάν water of life without cost Rv 22:17. μισθόν (q.v. 1 and 2a) Mt 10:41ab; J 4:36; 1 Cor 3:8, 14; AcPlCor 2:36 (TestSol 1:2, 10). Money: ἀργύρια Mt 28:15; ἀνὰ δηνάριον a denarius each Mt 20:9f. ἐλεημοσύνην Ac 3:3. βραχύ τι a little or a bite J 6:7; eternal life Mk 10:30 (Jos., C. Ap. 2, 218 βίον ἀμείνω λαβεῖν); the Spirit (schol. on Plato 856e ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα) J 7:39; Ac 2:38; cp. Gal 3:14; 1 Cor 2:12; 2 Cor 11:4; forgiveness of sin Ac 10:43 (Just., D. 54, 1); grace Ro 1:5; cp. 5:17; the victor’s prize 1 Cor 9:24f; the crown of life Js 1:12 (cp. Wsd 5:16 λ. τὸ διάδημα). συμφύγιον/σύμφυτον καὶ ὅπλον εὐδοκίας λάβωμεν Ἰησοῦν χριστόν the sense of this clause, restored from AcPl Ha 8, 23–24 and AcPl Ox 1602, 33–35 (=BMM recto 29–31) emerges as follows: and let us take Jesus Christ as our refuge/ally and shield, the assurance of God’s goodwill toward us. The early and late rain Js 5:7. ἔλεος receive mercy Hb 4:16 (Just., D. 133, 1). λ. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ υἱοῦ (θεοῦ) receive the name of the Son of God (in baptism) Hs 9, 12, 4. διάδοχον receive a successor Ac 24:27 (cp. Pliny the Younger, Ep. 9, 13 successorem accipio). τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ λαβέτω ἕτερος let another man receive his position 1:20 (Ps 108:8). τόπον ἀπολογίας λ. (τόπος 4) 25:16. λ. τι μετὰ εὐχαριστίας receive someth. w. thankfulness 1 Ti 4:4 (but s. 1 above, end.—On the construction with μετά cp. Libanius, Or. 63 p. 392, 3 F. μετὰ ψόγου λ.). τί ἔχεις ὅ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what have you that you did not receive? 1 Cor 4:7 (Alciphron 2, 6, 1 τί οὐ τῶν ἐμῶν λαβοῦσα ἔχεις;). Of punishments (cp. δίκην λ. Hdt. 1, 115; Eur., Bacch. 1312. ποινάς Eur., Tro. 360. πληγάς Philyllius Com. [V B.C.] 11 K.; GrBar 4:15 καταδίκην; Jos., Ant. 14, 336 τιμωρίαν) λ. περισσότερον κρίμα receive a punishment that is just so much more severe Mt 23:13 [14] v.l. (cp. κρίμα 4b); Mk 12:40; Lk 20:47; cp. Js 3:1. οἱ ἀνθεστηκότες ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται those who oppose will bring punishment upon themselves Ro 13:2. πεῖράν τινος λ. become acquainted with, experience, suffer someth. (X., An. 5, 8, 15; Polyb. 6, 3, 1; 28, 9, 7; 29, 3, 10; Diod S 12, 24, 4 τὴν θυγατέρα ἀπέκτεινεν, ἵνα μὴ τῆς ὕβρεως λάβῃ πεῖραν; 15, 88, 4; Jos., Ant. 2, 60; Preisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Museums zu Kairo [1911] 2, 11; 3, 11 πεῖραν λ. δαίμονος) μαστίγων πεῖραν λ. Hb 11:36 (the phrase in a diff. mng. vs. 29; s. 9b above).
    ⓒ Also used as a periphrasis for the passive: οἰκοδομὴν λ. be edified 1 Cor 14:5. περιτομήν be circumcised J 7:23 (Just., D. 23, 5 al.). τὸ χάραγμα receive a mark = be marked Rv 14:9, 11; 19:20; 20:4. καταλλαγήν be reconciled Ro 5:11. ὑπόμνησίν τινος be reminded of = remember someth. 2 Ti 1:5 (Just., D 19, 6 μνήμην λαμβάνητε); λήθην τινὸς λ. forget someth. (Timocles Com. [IV B.C.], Fgm. 6, 5 K.; Aelian, VH 3, 18 end, HA 4, 35; Jos., Ant. 2, 163; 202; 4, 304; Just., D. 46, 5 ἵνα μὴ λήθη ὑμᾶς λαμβάνῃ τοῦ θεοῦ) 2 Pt 1:9; χαρὰν λ. experience joy, rejoice Hv 3, 13, 2 ; GJs 12:2; ἀρχὴν λ. be begun, have its beginning (Pla et al.; Polyb. 1, 12, 9; Sext. Emp., Phys. 1, 366; Aelian, VH 2, 28; 12, 53; Dio Chrys. 40, 7; Philo, Mos. 1, 81 τρίτον [σημεῖον] … τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ γίνεσθαι λαβὸν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ; Just., D. 46, 4 τὴν ἀρχὴν λαβούσης ἀπὸ Ἀβραὰμ τῆς περιτομῆς; Ath. 19, 2 ἑτέραν ἀρχὴν τοῦ κόσμου λαβόντος) Hb 2:3; ApcPt Rainer ln. 19.—λ. τι ἀπό τινος receive someth. from someone (Epict. 4, 11, 3 λ. τι ἀπὸ τῶν θεῶν; Herm. Wr. 1, 30; ApcMos 19 ὅτε δὲ ἔλαβεν ἀπʼ ἐμοῦ τὸν ὄρκον; Just., D. 78, 10 τῶν λαβόντων χάριν ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ) 1J 2:27; 3:22. Also τὶ παρά τινος (Pisander Epicus [VI B.C.] Fgm. 5 [in Athen. 11, 469d]; Diod S 5, 3, 4 λαβεῖν τι παρὰ τῶν θεῶν; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 8 [Stone p. 12] λαβὼν τὴν εὐχὴν παρʼ αὐτῶν; Just., A I, 60, 3 ἐνέργειαν τὴν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λεγομένην λαβεῖν τὸν Μωυσέα.—παρά A3aβ) J 10:18b; Ac 2:33; 3:5; 20:24; Js 1:7; 2J 4; Rv 2:28. λ. τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος receive bail from Jason Ac 17:9 (s. ἱκανός 1). λ. τι ὑπό τινος be given someth. by someone 2 Cor 11:24. κλῆρον καὶ μερισμὸν λαμβάνοντες AcPl Ha 8, 18/Ox 1602, 22f [λαβόντες]=BMM recto 23f (s. κλῆρος 2). λ. τι ἔκ τινος receive someth. fr. a quantity of someth.: ἐκ τοῦ πληρώματος αὐτοῦ ἐλάβομεν χάριν from his fullness we have received favor J 1:16. ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ ἐλάβετε Hs 9, 24, 4.—λ. ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν (s. ἀνάστασις 2a) Hb 11:35. On ἐν γαστρὶ εἴληφα (LXX) GJs 4:2 and 4 s. γαστήρ 2 and συλλαμβάνω 3.—B. 743. Schmidt, Syn. III 203–33. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λαμβάνω

  • 12 μέν

    μέν, Particle, used partly to express certainty on the part of the speaker or writer; partly, and more commonly, to point out that the word or clause with which it stands is correlative to another word or clause that is to follow, the latter word or clause being introduced by δέ.
    A
    I μέν used absolutely to express certainty, not followed by correlative δέ, indeed, of a truth, synonymous with μήν, as appears from the [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. form ἦ μέν in protestations and oaths (where [dialect] Att. used ἦ μήν)

    , καί μοι ὄμοσσον, ἦ μ. μοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν Il.1.77

    , cf. 14.275;

    ἦ μέν τοι τάδε πάντα τελείεται Od.14.160

    , cf. Il.24.416;

    τοῦτον ἐξορκοῖ, ἦ μέν οἱ διηκονήσειν Hdt.4.154

    , cf. 5.93, etc.: with neg.,

    οὐ μὲν γάρ τι κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392

    , etc.;

    ὤμοσα, μὴ μὲν.. ἀναφῆναι 4.254

    , cf. Hdt.2.118, 179;

    ἔξαρνος ἦν, μὴ μὲν ἀποκτεῖναι Id.3.67

    , cf. 99: without neg.,

    ἀνδρὸς μὲν τόδε σῆμα πάλαι κατατεθνηῶτος Il.7.89

    : also in Trag.,

    ἀκτὴ μὲν ἥδε τῆς περιρρύτου χθονός S.Ph.1

    , cf. 159 (anap.), OC44, E.Med. 676, 1129, etc.;

    καὶ μέν Il.1.269

    , 9.632, etc.; οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδὲ .. 2.703, 12.212; γε μέν, cf. γε 1.5.
    2 an answering clause with δέ is sts. implied, τὴν μὲν ἐγὼ σπουδῇ δάμνημ' ἐπέεσσι her can I hardly subdue, [ but all others easily], Il.5.893; ὡς μὲν λέγουσι as indeed they say, [ but as I believe not], E.Or. 8; καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἦν αὐτῷ πόλεμος (with no ἔπειτα δέ to follow), X. An.1.9.14; so νῦν μέν σ' ἀφήσω I will let you go this time, Herod.5.81: to give force to assertions made by a person respecting himself, wherein opposition to other persons is implied,

    ὡς μὲν ἐμῷ θυμῷ δοκεῖ Od. 13.154

    ; δοκεῖν μέν μοι ἥξει τήμερον [τὸ πλοῖον] Pl.Cri. 43d: hence with the pers. Pron.,

    ἐγὼ μέν νυν θεοῖσι ἔχω χάριν Hdt.1.71

    ; ἐγὼ μὲν οὐδέν (sc. θέλω) S.Ant. 498;

    ἐμοῦ μὲν οὐχ ἑκόντος Id.Aj. 455

    ;

    ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα X.Cyr.1.4.12

    , cf. 4.2.45, etc.: with the demonstr. Pron.,

    τούτου μὲν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐγὼ σοφώτερός εἰμι Pl.Ap. 21d

    : generally, to emphasize the preceding word, πολλὴ μὲν ἡ μεταβολή μοι γέγονεν great indeed has been the change, Is.1.1, cf. Simon.5.1, etc.
    3 μέν is used alone in questions, when the answer is assumed, I take it, θέμις μὲν ἡμᾶς χρησμὸν εἰδέναι θεοῦ; E.Med. 676, cf. Ion 520 (troch.), Hipp. 316, S.Ant. 634, Ar.Av. 1214; Ἕλλην μέν ἐστι καὶ Ἑλληνίζει; Pl.Men. 82b.
    II μέν folld. by δέ in the correlative clause or clauses, on the one hand, on the other hand; commonly in Classical Gr., less freq. in later Gr. (rare in NT):
    1 μέν.., δέ .. (or when the correlative clause is neg., μέν.., οὐδέ .., Il.1.318, 536), to mark opposition, Hom., etc.—The opposed clauses commonly stand together, but are freq. separated by clauses, parenthetic or explanatory; e.g. μέν in Il.2.494 is answered by δέ in 511, 527 sq.; in X.An.1.9.2, πρῶτον μέν is answered by ἐπεὶ δέ in <*> 6; in Id.Mem.1.1.2, πρῶτον μέν is answered by θαυμαστὸν δέ in 1.2.1.
    2 to connect a series of clauses containing different matter, though with no opposition, Il.1.18sq., 306 sq. (five δέ-clauses), 433 sq. (eight δέ-clauses), cf. X.An. 1.3.14,7.10sq.: freq. when the members of a group or class are distinctly specified, παῖδες δύο, πρεσβύτερος μὲν Ἀρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος ib.1.1.1; τάφρος.., τὸ μὲν εὖρος ὀργυιαὶ πέντε, τὸ δὲ βάθος ὀργυιαὶ τρεῖς ib.1.7.14; πρῶτος μέν.., δεύτερος δέ.., τρίτος δέ .. ib.5.6.9; τότε μέν.., τότε δέ .., at one time.., at another.., ib.6.1.9, etc.: esp. with the Art. used as a Pron., ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. ; τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ .., etc.
    3 the principal word is freq. repeated,

    οἳ περὶ μὲν βουλὴν Δαναῶν, περὶ δ' ἐστὲ μάχεσθαι Il.1.258

    , cf. 288, Od.15.70;

    ἔνι μὲν φιλότης, ἐν δ' ἵμερος, ἐν δ' ὀαριστύς Il.14.216

    ;

    Ξέρξης μὲν ἄγαγεν.., Ξέρξης δ' ἀπώλεσεν A.Pers. 550

    , cf. 560, 694, 700 (all lyr.);

    χαλεπαίνει μὲν πρῳρεύς, χαλεπαίνει δὲ κυβερνήτης X.An.5.8.20

    .
    4 one of the correlative clauses is sts. independent, while the other takes the part. or some other dependent form, ἐβλασφήμει κατ' ἐμοῦ.., μάρτυρα μὲν.. οὐδένα παρασχόμενος.., παρεκελεύετο δέ .. D.57.11;

    οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, πεζοὶ μὲν οὐκέτι, τῶν δὲ ἱππέων ὁ λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη X.An.1.10.12

    , cf. 2.1.7, 5.6.29;

    ὧν ἐπιμεμφομένα σ' ἁδεῖα μὲν ἀντία δ' οἴσω S.Tr. 123

    , cf. OC 522 (bothlyr.);

    χωρὶς μὲν τοῦ ἐστερῆσθαι.., ἔτι δὲ καὶ.. δόξω ἀμελῆσαι Pl.Cri.44

     b.
    5 μέν and δέ freq. oppose two clauses, whereof one is subordinate to the other in meaning or emphasis, ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνο θαυμάζω, εἰ Λακεδαιμονίοις μέν ποτε.. ἀντήρατε,.. νυνὶ δὲ ὀκνεῖτ' ἐξιέναι (for εἰ.. ἀντάραντες νυνὶ ὀκνεῖτε) D.2.24, cf. E.IT 116, Lys.34.11, X.Mem.2.7.11, etc.: so in an anacoluthon, τρία μὲν ὄντα.. ναυτικά.., τούτων δ' εἰ περιόψεσθε τὰ δύο, κτλ., Th.1.36.
    6 μέν is not always answered by δέ, but freq. by other equiv. Particles, as ἀλλά, Il.1.22 sq., 2.703 sq., Pi.O.9.1, A.Pers. 176, X.An.1.7.17:—by μέντοι, Hdt.1.36, S.Ph. 350, D.21.189, etc.:—by ἀτάρ, Il.6.84, 124, A.Pr. 342, S.OT 1051sq., Pl. Tht. 172c, etc. (so μέν.., αὐτάρ in [dialect] Ep., Il.1.50, Od.19.513, etc.):— by αὖ, Il.11.108, Od.4.210:—by αὖθις, S.Ant. 165:—by αὖτε, Il.1.234, Od.22.5:—by temporal Particles, πρῶτα μέν.., εἶτα .. S.El. 261; πρῶτον μέν.., μετὰ τοῦτο .. X.An.6.1.5-7; μάλιστα μὲν δὴ.., ἔπειτα μέντοι .. S.Ph. 350, cf. OT 647:—rarely by μήν with neg.,

    οὐδὲν μὴν κωλύει Pl.Phdr. 268e

    ;

    οὐ μὴν αὐταί γε Id.Phlb. 12d

    .
    b when the opposition is emphatic, δέ is sts. strengthd., as ὅμως δέ .. S.OT 785, Ph. 473, 1074, etc. (so

    ἀλλ' ὅμως El. 450

    ); δ' αὖ .. Il.4.415, X.An.1.10.5; δ' ἔμπης .. Il.1.561-2.
    c μέν is sts. answered by a copul. Particle, κάρτιστοι μὲν ἔσαν καὶ καρτίστοις ἐμάχοντο ib. 267, cf. 459, Od. 22.475, S.Aj.1, Tr. 689, E.Med. 125 (anap.), etc.: rarely in Prose,

    τρία μὲν ἔτη ἀντεῖχον.., καὶ οὐ πρότερον ἐνέδοσαν Th.2.65

     (dub.).
    B μέν before other Particles:
    I where each Particle retains its force,
    1 μὲν ἄρα, in Hom. μέν ῥα, Il.2.1, 6.312, Od.1.127, Pl. Phdr. 258d, R. 467d, etc.
    2

    μὲν γάρ S.OT62

    , Th.1.142, etc.:— in Hom. there is freq. no second clause, Od.1.173, 392, cf. S.OT 1062, etc.;

    μὲν γὰρ δή Il.11.825

    ;

    μὲν γάρ τε 17.727

    .
    3 μέν γε, when a general statement is explained in detail,

    Κορινθίοις μέν γε ἔνσπονδοί ἐστε Th.1.40

    , cf. 70, 6.86, Hdt.6.46, Antipho 5.14, Lys. 13.27, Is.4.8, Ar.Nu. 1382, V. 564, E.Fr.909.4.
    4

    μὲν δή Il.1.514

    , Hdt.1.32, etc.: freq. used to express positive certainty,

    ἀλλ' οἶσθα μὲν δή S. Tr. 627

    , cf. OT 294;

    τὰ μὲν δὴ τόξ' ἔχεις Id.Ph. 1308

    ; esp. as a conclusion,

    τοῦτο μὲν δὴ.. ὁμολογεῖται Pl.Grg. 470b

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.1.6, etc.: in closing a statement,

    τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα A.Pr. 500

    , etc.: used in answers to convey full assent, ἦ μὲν δή (cf. supr. A) Il.9.348, Od.4.33;

    καὶ μὲν δή.. γε Pl.R. 409b

    ; οὐ μὲν δή, to deny positively, Il.8.238, X.Cyr.1.6.9, Pl.Tht. 148e, etc.;

    οὐ μὲν δή.. γε X.An.2.2.3

    , 3.2.14; ἀλλ' οὔ τι μὲν δή .. Pl.Tht. 187a.
    5 μὲν οὖν, v. infr.11.2.
    II where the Particles combine so as to form a new sense,
    1 μέν γε at all events, at any rate (not in Trag.),

    τοῦτο μέν γ' ἤδη σαφές Ar.Ach. 154

    , cf. Nu. 1172, Lys. 1165, Ra.80, Th.3.39;

    μέν γέ που Pl.R. 559b

    , Tht. 147a.
    2 μὲν οὖν is freq. used with a corresponding δέ, so that each Particle retains its force, Od.4.780, Pi.O.1.111, S.OT 244, 843; Ph. 359, D.2.5, etc.: but freq. also abs., so then, S.Ant.65;

    ταῦτα μὲν οὖν παραλείψω D.2.3

    ; esp. in replies, sts. in strong affirmation,

    παντάπασι μὲν οὖν Pl.Tht. 158d

    ; κομιδῇ μὲν οὖν ib. 159e; πάνυ μὲν οὖν ib. 159b; ἀνάγκη μὲν οὖν ib. 189e; also to substitute a new statement so as to correct a preceding statement, nay rather, κακοδαίμων; Answ. βαρυδαίμων μὲν οὖν! Ar.Ec. 1102; μου πρὸς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀποψῶ wipe your nose on my head: Answ. ἐμοῦ μὲν οὖν .. nay on mine, Id.Eq. 911, cf. A.Pers. 1032 (lyr.), Ag. 1090 (lyr.), 1396, S.Aj. 1363, El. 1503, OT 705, Ar.Ra. 241, Pl.Cri. 44b, Grg. 466a, 470b, Prt. 309d, etc.; also

    μὲν οὖν δή S.Tr. 153

    ;

    καὶ δὴ μὲν οὖν Id.OC31

    ; cf. οὐμενοῦν: in NT μενοῦν and μενοῦνγε, to begin a sentence, yea rather, Ev.Luc.11.28, Ep.Rom.9.20, etc., cf. Phryn.322, Hsch.—In [dialect] Ion., μέν νυν is used for μὲν οὖν, Hdt.1.18, 4.145, etc.
    3 by μέν τε, if δέ τε follows, the two clauses are more closely combined than by τε.., τε .., Il.5.139, al.; μέν τε is freq. answered by δέ alone, 16.28, al.; by ἀλλά, αὐτάρ, 17.727, Od.1.215, al.; perh. by ἠδέ, Il.4.341:— Hom. also uses μέν τε abs., when τε loses its force, as after ἦ, τίς, etc., Il.2.145, al.
    4 μέν τοι in Hom. always occurs in speeches, where τοι can be regarded as the dat. of the Pron.: later, μέντοι is written as a single word, and is used:
    a with a conj. force, yet, nevertheless, A.Pr. 320, 1054 (anap.), S.Tr. 413, etc.; and sts. stands for δέ, answering to μέν, v. supr. A.11.6 a.
    b as an Adv., in strong protestations, οὐ μέντοι μὰ Δία .. D.4.49; in eager or positive assent, of course, φαμέν τι εἶναι .. ; Answ.

    φαμὲν μέντοι νὴ Δία Pl.Phd. 65d

    , al.: with a neg. to give emphasis to a question, οὐ σὺ μέντοι .. ; why, are you not.. ? Id.Prt. 309a, cf. Phdr. 229b, R. 339b, etc.: sts. to express impatience, ὄμνυμι γάρ σοι—τίνα μέντοι, τίνα θεῶν; Id.Phdr. 236d; τί μ. πρῶτον ἦν, τί πρῶτον ἦν; nay what was the first? Ar.Nu. 787;

    οὗτος, σὲ λέγω μ. Id.Ra. 171

    ; σὺ μέντοι .. Luc.Alex.44: with imper., to enforce the command, τουτὶ μ. σὺ φυλάττου only take heed.., Ar. Pax 1100, cf.Av. 661, X.An.1.4.8: in answers, γελοῖον μέντἂν εἴη nay it would be absurd, Pl.Tht. 158e; summing up a long temporal clause, And.1.130.
    c

    μέντοι γε X.Cyr.5.5.24

    , etc.;

    οὐ μ. γε Diog.Apoll.5

    : in later Gr. μέντοιγε stands first in the sentence,

    μ. οὐ θέλω PLond.3.897.13

     (i A.D.); also

    γε μέντοι A.Ag. 938

    , S.OT 778, 1292, E.Hec. 600;

    ὅμως γε μ. Ar.Ra.61

    .
    d καὶ μ. καί is used to add a point to be noted, Heraclit.28, Pl.R. 331d; also καί.. μ., νῦν σοι καιρός ἐστιν ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν παιδείαν, καὶ φυλάξασθαι μέντοι .. and of course to take care.., X.An.4.6.15 (v.l.), cf. 1.8.20, Pl.Prt. 339c, Tht. 143a.
    e ἀλλὰ μέντοι well, if it comes to that, X.An.4.6.16; well, of course, Pl.R. 331e, etc.; cf. μέντον.
    C for μέν after other Particles, see each Particle.
    D Position of μέν. Like δέ, it usu. stands as the second word in a sentence. But when a sentence begins with words common to its subordinate clauses, μέν stands second in the first of these clauses, as

    ἥδε γὰρ γυνὴ δούλη μέν, εἴρηκεν δ' ἐλεύθερον λόγον S.Tr.63

    ; οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι ἐτάξαντο μέν.., ἡσύχαζον δέ .. Th.4.73, cf. 113, etc. It also attaches itself to words which mark opposition, as πρῶτον μέν, τότε μέν, ἐγὼ μέν, even when these do not stand first: sts. however it precedes them,

    ὡς μὲν ἐγὼ οἶμαι Pl.Phdr. 228b

    ;

    ὡς μέν τινες ἔφασαν X.Cyr.5.2.28

    . It generally stands between the Art. and Noun, or the Prep. and its Case: but if special stress is laid on the Noun, this is sts. neglected, as

    οἱ Τεγεᾶται μὲν ἐπηυλίσαντο, Μαντινῆς δὲ ἀπεχώρησαν Th.4.134

    ; ἀνὰ τὸ σκοτεινὸν μέν .. Id.3.22; also

    τῇ σῇ μὲν εὐδαιμονίῃ, τῇ ἐμεωυτοῦ δὲ κακοδαιμονίῃ Hdt. 1.87

    .
    II μέν is freq. repeated:
    1 when, besides the opposition of two main clauses, a subordinate opposition is introduced into the first, ὁ μὲν ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει, ὑμῶν δέ .. X.An.1.6.9, cf. 5.8.24, Th.8.104, D.18.214, 23.208.
    2 in apodosi with the demonstr. Pron. or Adv., τὸν μὲν καλέουσι θέρος, τοῦτον μὲν προσκυνέουσι, τὸν δὲ χειμῶνα .. Hdt.2.121; ὅσοι μὲν δὴ νομοῦ τοῦ Θηβαίου εἰσί, οὗτοι μέν [νυν].. αἶγας θύουσι· ὅσοι δὲ.. νομοῦ τοῦ Μενδησίου εἰσί, οὗτοι δὲ.. ὄϊς θύουσι ib.42, cf.3.108, al.; ὅτε μέν με οἱ ἄρχοντες ἔταττον.., τότε μὲν ἔμενον.., τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ τάττοντος,.. ἐνταῦθα δέ .. Pl.Ap. 28e, cf. Grg. 512a.
    3 μέν used absolutely is freq. folld. by a correlative

    μέν, εἰ μὲν οὖν ἡμεῖς μὲν.. ποιοῦμεν Id.R. 421a

    .
    III μέν is sts. omitted (esp. in Poetry) where it is implied in the following

    δέ, φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων Il.22.157

    ;

    ἐλευθεροῦτε πατρίδ', ἐλευθεροῦτε δὲ παῖδας A. Pers. 403

    ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf. Ar.Nu. 396, Pl.Sph. 221e, Arist.Po. 1447b14, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μέν

  • 13 σημαίνω

    σημαίνω, Il.10.58, etc.; [full] σᾱμαίνω, Schwyzer686.23 ([place name] Pamphylia): [dialect] Ion. [tense] impf.
    A

    σημαίνεσκον Q.S.4.193

    : [tense] fut.

    σημᾰνῶ A.Ag. 497

    , Th.6.20, [dialect] Ion.

    - ᾰνέω Od.12.26

    , Hdt.1.75: [tense] aor. ἐσήμηνα ib.43, Th.5.71, [dialect] Ep.

    σήμηνα Il.23.358

    ; but in codd. of X. (HG1.1.2, al.) and later writers (Str.13.3.6, Act.Ap.25.27, Polyaen.1.41.3, Arr.An.1.6.2) ἐσήμᾱνα, and so in Mitteis Chr.29.8 (ii B.C.): [tense] pf.

    σεσήμαγκα Aristobul.

     ap. Eus. PE13.12, Arr.Epict.3.26.29:—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. σημᾰνοῦμαι, [dialect] Ion.

    - έομαι Hp. Prog.3

    , etc.: [tense] aor.

    ἐσημηνάμην Il.7.175

    , etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.

    σημανθήσομαι S.E.M.8.267

    , ([etym.] ἐπι-) E. Ion 1593: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. in pass. sense, Hp. Int.44: [tense] aor.

    ἐσημάνθην D.47.16

    : [tense] pf.

    σεσήμασμαι Hdt.2.39

    , Lys.32.7, Pl.Lg. 954a, etc.; [ per.] 3sg.

    σεσήμανται Hdt.2.125

    , inf.

    σεσημάνθαι Ar. Lys. 1196

    : ([etym.] σῆμα):—show by a sign, indicate, point out,

    τέρματα Il.23.358

    ;

    δείξω ὁδὸν ἠδὲ ἕκαστα σημανέω Od.12.26

    ; τοῦτον σημήνας after indicating the person, Hdt.1.5;

    τέκμαρ A.Ch. 667

    ;

    θησαύρισμα S.Ph. 37

    ;

    σ. τι περί τινος Pl.Lg. 682a

    ;

    σ. ὅ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν X.Ap.12

    ; σ. εὔδια πάντα (sc. εἶναι) Theoc.22.22:—[voice] Med., πάντα σημαίνει you have all things shown you (?), Epigr.Gr.1039.11 ([place name] Limyra).
    2 abs., give signs, φθόγγος, φῶς ς., A.Supp. 245, Ag. 293;

    ὁ λόγος σημαινέτω S.Tr. 345

    ; σ. καπνῷ make signal, A.Ag. 497: freq. in E. in [tense] fut. with

    αὐτός, πλοῦς αὐτὸς σημανεῖ Hel. 151

    ;

    τὸ δ' ἔργον αὐτὸ σημανεῖ Andr. 265

    ; αὐτὸ σημανεῖ (without Subst.) Ph. 623;

    τἄλλα δ' αὐτὸ σημανεῖ Ba. 976

    .
    3 of the Delphic oracle,

    οὔτε λέγει οὔτε κρύπτει ἀλλὰ σημαίνει Heraclit.93

    ; so of omens, X.Mem.1.1.2, etc.;

    σ. ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς Id.An.6.1.31

    ;

    περί τινος Id.Mem.1.1.19

    ;

    ἐπὶ τοῖς μέλλουσι γενήσεσθαι Th.2.8

    ;

    πρὸ τῶν μελλόντων X.HG5.4.17

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    σημαίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν ἐμπύρων Plu.2.222f

    , etc.
    4 in later Prose intr., appear, be manifest, Arist.HA 533a11 (but [voice] Pass. in same sense, ib. 588b18);

    σ. ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων Pl.Epin. 989a

    ; cf.

    δηλόω 11

    .
    b σημαίνει impers., signs appear, Arist.Pr. 941b2, 944a4.
    II give a sign or signal to do a thing, or bid one do it, c. dat. pers. et inf., Hdt.1.116, 6.78, A.Ag.26, S.Aj. 688, X.An.6.1.24; give orders to, bear command over, c. dat.,

    πᾶσι δὲ σημαίνειν Il.1.289

    , cf. 10.58, 17.250; c. gen.,

    στρατοῦ Il.14.85

    ; also

    σ. ἐπὶ δμῳῇσι γυναιξίν Od.22.427

    : abs., give orders,

    ὁ δὲ σημαίνων ἐπέτελλεν Il.21.445

    , cf. Od.22.450: in part., σημαίνων,= σημάντωρ, S.OC 704 codd.
    2 in war or battle, give the signal of attack, etc., Th.2.84, etc.; in full,

    σ. τῇ σάλπιγγι And.1.45

    , X.An. 4.2.1, Achae.37.3;

    σ. τῷ κέρατι ὡς ἀναπαύεσθαι X.An.2.2.4

    : c. acc., σ. ἀναχώρησιν give a signal for retreat, Th.5.10;

    ἐπειδὰν ὁ σαλπιγκτὴς σημήνῃ τὸ πολεμικόν X.An.4.3.29

    , cf. 4.3.32;

    τὸ ἀνακλητικόν Plu.2.236e

    : c. inf., X.Cyr.1.4.18, etc.: impers. σημαίνει (sc. ὁ σαλπιγκτής), signal is given, as τοῖσι Ἕλλησι ὡς ἐσήμηνε when signal was given for the Greeks to attack, Hdt.8.11: c. inf., ἐσήμαινε παραρτέεσθαι πάντα signal was given to make all ready, Id.9.42, cf. E.Heracl. 830; also σ. ἐπὶ πλόον πῦρ gives the signal for sailing, Tryph.145.
    3 generally, σ. [τῷ ἵππῳ] τι, προχωρεῖν σ. τῷ ἵππῳ, X.Eq.9.4, 7.10.
    4 make signals,

    εἰς τὴν πόλιν Id.HG6.2.33

    ; σ. ὡς πολεμίων ἐπιόντων ib.7.2.5:—[voice] Pass., ἐσημάνθησαν προσπλέουσαι ib.6.2.34: abs.,

    σημανθέντων τῷ Ἀστυάγει ὅτι.. Id.Cyr.1.4.18

    .
    III signify, indicate, declare,

    φόνον E.HF 1218

    ;

    τινί τι Hdt.7.18

    , 9.49, S.OT 226: folld. by ὡς.. , Hdt.1.34; by ὅτι.. , S.OC 320, Pl.Phd. 62c;

    σ. ὅστις A.Pr. 618

    ; σ. ὅ τι χρή σοι συμπράσσειν ib. 297 (anap.); σ. ὅπῃ γῆς πεπλάνημαι ib. 564 (anap.);

    σ. ὅπου.. S.El. 1294

    ;

    σ. ὅτου τ' εἶ χὠπόθεν Id.Fr. 104

    ;

    σ. εἴτε.. Id.Ph.22

    ;

    σ. ποίῳ θανάτῳ.. Ev.Jo.12.33

    , 21.19: c. part., signify that a thing is,

    φρυκτοῦ φῶς.. σημαίνει μολόν A.Ag. 293

    ;

    Κρέοντα προσστείχοντα σημαίνουσί μοι S.OT79

    , cf. OC 1669;

    ταῦτα ὡς πολέμου ὄντος σημαίνει Pl.Lg. 626e

    , cf. 722e:—[voice] Pass., ὁ σημαινόμενος δοῦλος the abovementioned slave, POxy.283.12 (i A.D.): abs.,

    σημανθέντος

     it having been reported,

    PAmh.2.31.8

     (ii B.C.), cf. supr. 11.4.
    2 interpret, explain, Hdt.1.108; tell, speak, Id.3.106: abs., σήμαινε tell, S.OC51, cf.OT 1050;

    οὐ στηλῶν μόνον σ. ἐπιγραφή Th.2.43

    .
    3 of a writer, signify, indicate,

    ὅτι.. Str.8.6.5

    ; of words, sentences, etc., signify, mean,

    ταὐτὸν σημαίνει Pl.Cra. 393a

    , cf. 437c, Phdr. 275d, Arist.Ph. 213b30, etc.; σημαίνοντα significant sounds, opp. ἄσημα, Id.Po. 1457a32sq.:—[voice] Pass., τὸ σημαινόμενον the sense, meaning of words, Id.Rh. 1405b8, D.H.Th.31, A.D.Pron.12.27, al.; opp. τὸ σημαῖνον, Chrysipp.Stoic.2.38(pl.).
    B [voice] Med. σημαίνομαι, give oneself a token, i.e. conclude from signs, conjecture,

    τὰ μὲν σημαίνομαι, τὰ δ' ἐκπέπληγμαι S.Aj.32

    ; ἄστροις σ. [τὰς πόλεις], prov. in Ael.NA7.48; σ. τι ἔκ τινος ib.2.7; of dogs hunting,

    μυξωτῆρσι σ. τι Opp.C.1.454

    .
    II provide with a sign or mark, seal, σημαίνεσθαι βύβλῳ (sc. βοῦν), i.e. by sealing a strip of byblus round his horn, Hdt.2.38, cf. Pl.Lg. 954c, X.Cyr.8.2.17, Is. 7.1,2, Hyp.Ath.8:—[voice] Pass., εὖ σεσημάνθαι to be well sealed up, Ar.Lys. 1196; τὰ σεσημασμένα, opp. τὰ ἀσήμαντα, Pl.Lg. 954a, cf. Lys.32.7, D.39.17, Ath.Mitt.7.368.
    2 mark out, choose for oneself,

    τοὺς εὐρωστοτάτους Plb.3.71.7

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σημαίνω

  • 14 ὥστε

    A as Adv., bearing the same relation to ὡς as ὅστε to ὅς, and used by Hom. more freq. than ὡς in similes, when it is commonly written divisim, and is relat. to a demonstr. ὥς: sts. c. [tense] pres. Indic., Il.2.459 sq., 12.421, 13.703: sts. c. [tense] aor.,

    ὥς τε λέων ἐχάρη 3.23

    : sts. c. subj. [tense] pres. or [tense] aor., 2.474 sq., 11.67, 16.428, Od.22.302: all three usages combined in one simile, with varied construction, Il.5.136-9:—the verb is sts. omitted,

    λάμφ' ὥς τε στεροπή 10.154

    : this usage of ὥστε is chiefly [dialect] Ep. (Pi. uses ὧτε, q. v.), but it occurs in Alc.(?)27 (prob.), B.12.124 and sts. in Trag.,

    κατώρυχες δ' ἔναιον ὥστ' ἀήσυροι μύρμηκες A.Pr. 452

    , cf. Th.62, Pers. 424, Ch. 421 (lyr.), S.OC 343, Ant. 1033, Tr. 112 (lyr.).
    II to mark the power or virtue by which one does a thing, as being, inasmuch as, like ἅτε, τὸν δ' ἐξήρπαξ' Ἀφροδίτη ῥεῖα μάλ', ὥ. θεός Il.3.381, cf. 18.518; ὥ. περὶ ψυχῆς since it was for life, Od.9.423;

    ὥ. ταῦτα νομίζων Hdt.1.8

    , cf. 5.83, 101, 6.94.
    B as Conj. to express the actual or intended result of the action in the principal clause:
    I mostly c. inf., so as or for to do a thing, twice in Hom., εἰ δέ σοι θυμὸς ἐπέσσυται, ὥ. νέεσθαι if thy heart is eager to return, Il.9.42; οὐ τηλίκος.., ὥ. σημάντορι πάντα πιθέσθαι not of such age as to obey a master in all things, Od.17.21;

    ῥηϊδίως κεν ἐργάσσαιο, ὥ. σε κεἰς ἐνιαυτὸν ἔχειν Hes.Op.44

    ; ὥ. ἀποπλησθῆναι ( ἀποπλῆσαι codd.)

    τὸν χρησμόν Hdt.8.96

    : freq. in Pi., O.9.74, N.5.1, 35, al.; also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. after demonstratives,

    οὔπω τοσοῦτον ἠπατημένος κυρῶ ὥστ' ἄλλα χρῄζειν S.OT 595

    , etc.; this constr. is found in cases where (as in Il.9.42 supr. cit.) ὥστε seems superfluous; so after

    ἐθέλειν, Κύπρις.. ἤθελ' ὥ. γίγνεσθαι τόδε E.Hipp. 1327

    ; after ἔστι, for ἔξεστι, S.Ph. 656; after ψηφίζεσθαι, Th.5.17; after ἐπαίρειν, E.Supp. 581;

    ἐπαγγελλόμενοι ὥ. βοηθεῖν Th.8.86

    ; after words implying request,

    δεηθέντες.. ὥ. ψηφίσασθαι Id.1.119

    ;

    πεῖσαι ὥ. συγχωρῆσαι Id.8.45

    .
    2 after Comparatives with ἤ, when the possibility of the consequence is denied (cf.

    ὡς B. 111.2

    ), μέζω κακὰ ἢ ὥστε ἀνακλαίειν woes too great for tears, Hdt. 3.14;

    μεῖζον ἢ ὥστε φέρειν δύνασθαι κακόν X.Mem.3.5.17

    : but in Poetry ὥστε is sts. left out,

    νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν S.OT 1293

    ;

    κρείσσον' ἢ φέρειν κακά E.Hec. 1107

     (rarely in Prose, Pl.Tht. 149c); similarly with the Posit., ψυχρὸν ὥ. λούσασθαι too cold to bathe in, X.Mem.3.13.3; ἡμεῖς ἔτι νέοι ὥ. διελέσθαι too young to.., Pl.Prt. 314b;

    γέρων ἐκεῖνος ὥ. δ' ὠφελεῖν παρών E.Andr.80

    : this ὥστε is sts. omitted after words implying comparison, ὀλίγους εἶναι στρατιῇ τῇ Μήδων συμβαλέειν too few.. Hdt.6.109;

    ταπεινὴ ἡ διάνοια ἐγκαρτερεῖν Th.2.61

    , etc.
    3 ὥστε.. ἄν is used with inf., of contingencies more or less improbable,

    οὕτως ἐκάετο ὥστε μήτε.. ἄλλο τι ἢ γυμνοὶ ἀνέχεσθαι, ἥδιστά τε ἂν ἐς ὕσωρ ψυχρὸν σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ῥίπτειν Th.2.49

    , cf. S.OT 374, El. 1316, D.8.35.
    4 sts. implying on condition that.., like ἐφ' ᾧτε, παραδοῦναι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Ἀθηναίοις, ὥστε βουλεῦσαι ὅ τι ἂν ἐκείνοις δοκῇ Th.4.37, cf. X.An.5.6.26.
    II c. Indic., to express the actual or possible result with emphasis,

    οὐκ οὕτω φρενοβλαβὴς ὁ Πρίαμος οὐδὲ οἱ ἄλλοι.., ὥ. κινδυνεύειν ἐβούλοντο Hdt.2.120

     (fort. delendum ἐβούλοντο)

    ; ἀσθενέες οὕτω, ὥ... διατετρανέεις Id.3.12

    ; οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥ. ἐλπίζετε .. ; are you so foolish that you expect.. ? D.2.26,

    βέβηκεν, ὥ. πᾶν ἐν ἡσύχῳ ἔξεστι φωνεῖν S.OC82

    , cf. OT 533: freq. in X., Mem.2.2.3, al.; with ἄν and the [tense] impf. or [tense] aor. implying a supposed case,

    ὥστ', εἰ φρονῶν ἔπρασσον, οὐδ' ἂν ὧδ' ἐγιγνόμην κακός S.OC 271

    ; ὥστε οὐκ ἂν ἔλαθεν

    αὐτόθεν ὁρμώμενος Th.5.6

    :

    ὥστε τὴν πόλιν ἂν ἡγήσω πολέμου ἐργαστήριον εἶναι X.Ages.1.26

    .
    2 at the beginning of a sentence, to mark a strong conclusion, and so, therefore,

    ὥστ'.. ὄλωλα καί σε προσδιαφθερῶ S.Ph.75

    ;

    ὥστ' οὐχ ὕπνῳ γ' εὕδοντά μ' ἐξεγείρετε Id.OT 65

    ;

    ὥ. καὶ ταῦτα λεχθήσεται Arist.Metaph. 1004a22

    : c. imper.,

    θνητὸς δ' Ὀρέστης, ὥ. μὴ λίαν στένε S.El. 1172

    ;

    ὥ. θάρρει X.Cyr.1.3.18

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 311a;

    ὥ. ἂν βούλησθε χειροτονήσατε D.9.70

     cod.A (- ήσετε cett.); before a question,

    ὥ. τίς ἂν ἀπετόλμησε..; Lys.7.28

    .
    3 c. opt., with ἄν, Hdt.2.16;

    βρέφος γὰρ ἦν τότ'.., ὥστ' οὐκ ἂν αὐτὸν γνωρίσαιμ' E.Or. 379

    , cf. S.OT 857, Ar.Ach. 943 (lyr.). b. c. opt. in orat. obliq., X.HG3.5.23; after opt. in principal clause, Id.Oec.1.13.
    4 with subj., in order that, in Thessalian dialect,

    τὸς ταμίας φροντίσαι οὕστε.. γενειθεῖ τᾶ πόλι ἁ δόσις BCH59.38

     ([place name] Crannon); ἀντιλλαβέσθαι τᾶς πόλλιος (sic) οὕστε.. ἐς πάντουν ἐγλυθεῖ τοῦν δανείουν ib.p.37.
    III with part., instead of inf., after a part. in the principal clause,

    τοσοῦτον ἁπάντων διενεγκόντες, ὥσθ' ὑπὲρ Ἀργείων δυστυχησάντων Θηβαίοις.. ἐπιτάττοντες κτλ. Isoc.4.64

     (s. v.l.); οὕτω σφόδρα μισοῦντα τοῦτον, ὥστε πολὺ δὴ (ἂν Dobree)

    θᾶττον διαθέμενον κτλ. Is.9.16

    ;

    ὥστε.. δέον D.3.1

    .
    V in later Greek, folld. by Preps.,

    Παρμένοντι κλειδὸς ὥ. ἐπὶ τὸ Διοσκούριον Inscr.Délos316.83

     (iii B. C.);

    ξύλον ὥ. ἐπὶ τὴν ἅμαξαν IG11(2)

     287 A52 (iii B. C.); μόλυβδος ὥ. εἰς τὸ Κύνθιον ib.203A52 (iii B. C.); κριθῶν ὥ. εἰς τὰ κτήνη barley for the animals, PCair.Zen.251.5 (iii B. C.);

    ὥ. εἰς ξένια φοίνικας PHal.1.7.4

     (iii B. C.).
    b c. dat., for, χρεία αὐτοῦ ἐστὶν ὥ. Πισικλεῖ it is needed for P., PCair.Zen. 241 (iii B. C.);

    ὥ. τοῖς χησίν IG11(2).287

    A45 (iii B. C.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὥστε

  • 15 γάρ

    γάρ (Hom.+) conj. used to express cause, clarification, or inference. Never comes first in its clause; usu. second, but also third (Hb 11:32), or even fourth (2 Cor 1:19, as e.g. Menand., Epitr. 883 S. [=563 Kö.]; Lucian, Pisc. 10, Philops. 15; s. B-D-F §452; 475, 2; Denniston 56–114; Schwyzer II 560).
    ① marker of cause or reason, for
    ⓐ abs. Mk 1:22; 9:49; Lk 1:15; 21:4; J 2:25; Ac 2:25; Ro 1:9; 1 Cor 11:5 and oft.—It should be noted that γάρ w. a verb (and nothing else) can form a sentence (Demosth. 21, 28 δίδωσι γάρ.; Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 32 κινεῖ γάρ.; Menand., Sam. 666 S. [=321 Kö.] δεῖ γάρ.; Alexis Com. 286 Kock παύσει γάρ.; Axionicus Com. [IV B.C.] 6, 6 K.: Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 273 D.; Maximus Tyr. 10, 8g δύναται γάρ.; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 3, 3; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 163d ἠνεχυρίαστο γάρ.=for it had been seized as security; Aristaen., Ep. 2, 7; Anna Comn., Alexias 5, 1 vol. I p. 156, 8 R. προπέποτο γάρ.; et al.—Ps.-Demetrius, Form. Ep. p. 12, 2 as conclusion of a letter ὀφείλω γάρ.; Vi. Aesopi G 67 P. as the ending of a story: οὐκ ἔχεις γάρ.=you don’t have any [understanding, common sense]; Polyaenus 3 the introduction ends with the words: πρόδηλον γάρ.—See also CKraeling, JBL 44, 1925, 357f; RRottley, JTS 27, 1926, 407–9; RLightfoot, Locality and Doctrine in the Gosp. ’38, 10ff; CMoule, NTS 2, ’55/56, 58f) ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ. Mk 16:8 (s. φοβέω 1a). Conclusions of this kind at the end of Mk are also found in other lit. (Horapollo 2, 80 οὗτος γάρ; Plotin. V 5, 13, 36f κρείττον γὰρ τὸ ποιοῦν τοῦ ποιούμενου• τελειότερον γάρ. [Pvan der Horst, JTS n.s. 23, ’72, 121–24]).
    ⓑ used w. other particles and conjunctions ἰδοὺ γάρ (Jdth 5:23; 9:7; 12:12; 1 Macc 9:45) Lk 1:44, 48; 2:10; 6:23; 17:21; Ac 9:11; 2 Cor 7:11 al.; s. ἰδού 1c. καὶ γάρ (B-D-F §452, 3; B-D-R §452, 3) for (=Lat. etenim, Kühner-G. II 338; s. Chariton 3, 3, 16; 2 Macc 1:19; 4 Macc 1:2; 5:8) Mk 10:45; Lk 22:37; J 4:23; Ac 19:40; 1 Cor 5:7; Hb 5:12; 12:29; Hs 9, 8, 2; for also, for even (B-D-F §452, 3; ZNW 19, 1920, 175f) Mt 8:9; Lk 6:32f; 7:8; 11:4; J 4:45; Ro 11:1; 15:3; 16:2; 2 Cor 2:10. S. FGrosheide, καὶ γάρ in het NT: TSt 33, 1915, 108–10. γὰρ καί for also, for precisely 2 Cor 2:9 (ParJer 7:6 εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ ἀπεστάλην). τε γάρ for indeed (X., Mem. 1, 1, 3) Ro 1:26; 7:7; Hb 2:11 (s. τέ 2b). μὲν γάρ (3 Macc 2:15f) often followed by δέ, ἀλλά Ac 13:36; 23:8; 28:22; 2 Cor 9:1; 11:4; Hb 7:20; 12:10 (s. μέν 1aα, β); ὅτι μὲν γὰρ … ἀλλά Ac 4:16. καὶ γὰρ οὐ 1 Cor 11:9; οὐ γάρ Mt 10:20; Mk 4:22; 6:52; J 3:17; Ac 2:34; Ro 1:16; 2:11, 13, 28; 4:13; 1 Cor 1:17; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 4:30 and oft. μὴ γάρ Js 1:7 (TestAbr A 2, 79, 9 [Stone p. 6]; GrBar 6:6). οὐδὲ γάρ Lk 20:36; J 5:22; 7:5; 8:42; Ro 8:7; Gal 1:12 (s. οὐδέ 2). οὔτε γὰρ … οὔτε (Wsd 12:13; Sir 30:19) for neither … nor 1 Th 2:5.
    ⓒ γάρ is somet. repeated. It occurs twice either to introduce several arguments for the same assertion, as (Sir 37:13f; 38:1f; Wsd 7:16f) J 8:42; 1 Cor 16:7; 2 Cor 11:19f; or to have one clause confirm the other, as (Jdth 5:23; 7:27; 1 Macc 11:10) Mt 10:19f; Lk 8:29; J 5:21f, 46; Ac 2:15; Ro 6:14; 8:2f; Hv 5:3; or to have various assertions of one and the same sentence confirmed one after the other Mt 3:2f; J 3:19f (cp. Wsd 1:5f; EpJer 6; 7). γάρ also occurs three times (Wsd 9:13–15; 14:27–29) Mt 16:25–27; Lk 9:24–26; Ro 4:13–15; 2 Cor 3:9–11; four times Mk 8:35–38; Ro 1:16–18; even five times 1 Cor 9:15–17.
    ⓓ the general is confirmed by the specific Mk 7:10; Lk 12:52; Ro 7:2; 1 Cor 12:8; —the specific by the general Mt 7:8; 13:12; 22:14; Mk 4:22, 25; Ro 2:2 v.l.
    ⓔ oft. the thought to be supported is not expressed, but must be supplied fr. the context: (He has truly been born) for we have seen his star Mt 2:2. (Let no one refuse) ὸ̔ς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ Mk 8:35; Lk 9:24. (Let no disciple fail to testify) ὸ̔ς γὰρ ἐὰν ἐπαισχυνθῇ με Mk 8:38. This is common; cp. Ac 13:36; 21:13; 22:26; Ro 8:18; 14:10; 1 Cor 1:18; 5:3; 9:9, 17; 14:9. Sim. w. other particles καὶ γάρ Mt 15:27; 2 Cor 5:2; 13:4; Phil 2:27; 1 Th 3:4; 4:10. καὶ γὰρ οὐ 2 Cor 3:10. μὲν γάρ Ro 2:25; 1 Cor 5:3; 11:7; 2 Cor 9:1; Hb 7:18. οὐ γάρ Mt 9:13; Mk 9:6; Lk 6:43f; Ac 4:20; Ro 8:15; 2 Cor 1:13 (also s. καί 2iα, and μέν 1aα).
    ⓕ oft. in questions, where the English idiom leaves the word untransl., adds then, pray, or prefixes what! or why! to the question (Hyperid., Fgm. 219; Ael. Aristid. 47, 27 K.=23 p. 452 D.; TestJob 23:8 τὶ γὰρ μοι ἡ θρίξ … ; Jos., Bell. 1, 589, Ant. 9, 92) ἱνατί γὰρ … κρίνεται for what reason … should be judged 1 Cor 10:29. ποῖον γὰρ κλέος; what credit is there? 1 Pt 2:20. μὴ γὰρ … ἔρχεται; what! Is the Messiah to hail fr. Galilee? J 7:41. μὴ γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε; what! Have you no houses? 1 Cor 11:22. S. μή 3a.—ποία γὰρ ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν; what, pray, is your life? Js 4:14 v.l. πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; how in the world can I? Ac 8:31.—Esp. τίς γάρ; τί γάρ; in direct questions: Mt 9:5; 16:26; 23:17, 19 al. τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν; why, what crime has he committed? 27:23; sim. Mk 15:14; Lk 23:22. τί γάρ; transitional, well, then Ro 3:3; what does it matter? Phil 1:18.
    ② marker of clarification, for, you see (Dionys. Hal., De Isocr. p. 542 Raderm.; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 9 p. 373 κοῦφα γὰρ ὄντα; BGU 830, 20 ἐπεὶ γὰρ καὶ γείτων αὐτοῦ εἰμί=since I am also, as you see, his neighbor; Ps.-Demetr. 153 p. 35, 16 R.; Ps.-Callisth. 3, 2, 2 ἐγὼ γάρ=for I) Mt 12:40, 50; 23:3; 24:38; Mk 7:3; Lk 8:40; 9:14; J 3:16; 4:8f; Ro 7:2; Hb 2:8; 3:4; 2 Pt 2:8; AcPlCor 2, 4; 35.—Brief, explanatory parenthetical clauses (En 107:3 μυστηριακῶς γὰρ ἐδήλωσεν αὐτῷ; Diod S 13, 66, 6 ἦν γὰρ ὁ Κλέαρχος χαλεπός) Mt 4:18; Mk 1:16; 2:15; 5:42; 16:4; Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 16:5; Gal. 4:25 v.l. (cp. γὰρ δή 1 Cl 42:5). Akin to explanatory function is the use of γάρ as a narrative marker to express continuation or connection (in later Gk. writers, where more recent users of the texts, not finding the causal force they expect, would often prefer to see it replaced by δέ; unnecessarily, since the grammarian Trypho Alex. [I B.C.], Fgm. 54 ed. AvVelsen 1853 shows clearly that γάρ under certain circumstances εἷς οὖν ἐστὶν ἀντὶ τοῦ δέ=is one and the same thing as δέ). Indeed, in many instances γάρ appears to be used adverbially like our ‘now’ (in which the temporal sense gives way to signal an important point or transition), ‘well, then’, ‘you see’ (e.g. Diod S 20, 35, 1 ‘now’; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. §1; 120; 158; 197 [LDeubner, Bemerkungen z. Text der Vi. Pyth. des Jambl.’35, 30f]; Arrian, Ind. 33, 1 ἀλλὰ ἔπλωον γὰρ … =well, then, they sailed … ; schol. on Od. 4, 22 p. 174, 10 Dind.; ‘moreover’ SIG 1109, 28 [II A.D.]; ‘in the first place’ Jos., Bell. 7, 43, ‘now’ Ant. 1, 68): Ro 1:18; 2:25 (‘indeed’, ‘to be sure’ as Jos., Ant. 11, 8); 4:3, 9; 5:7 (‘but’); 12:3; 14:5; 1 Cor 10:1 (v.l. δέ); 2 Cor 1:12; 10:12; 11:5 (B δέ); Gal 1:11 (v.l. δέ); 5:13; 1 Ti 2:5. Cp. ἡμεῖς γὰρ J 9:28 v.l.—Confirming (Arrian, Ind. 22, 6 ἀλλὰ ἐκπεριπλῶσαι γὰρ … μέγα ἔργον ἐφαίνετο=but to sail seaward seemed indeed a dangerous undertaking; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 192 ἅπασαι μὲν γὰρ … =What has just been stated is apparent from the fact that all …). Especially in replies γάρ confirms what has been asked about (B-D-F §452, 2) yes, indeed; certainly 1 Th 2:20; 1 Cor 9:10.
    ③ marker of inference, certainly, by all means, so, then. In self-evident conclusions, esp. in exclamations, strong affirmations, etc. (Diogenes the Cynic in Diog. L. 6, 47 παῦσαι γάρ=stop, then) μὴ γὰρ οἰέσθω ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος not for a moment let such a person think Js 1:7; μὴ γάρ τις ὑμῶν πασχέτω by no means let any of you suffer 1 Pt 4:15; ἀναλογίσασθε γὰρ τὸν … ὑπομεμενηκότα yes indeed, consider him who endured Hb 12:3; οὐ γάρ no, indeed! Ac 16:37 (Aristoph., Nub. 232, Ran. 58; Pla., Rep. 492e; Lucian, Jupp. Conf. 16). In weakened sense it is somet. resumptive, esp. in long periodic sentences: ηὐδόκησαν γάρ they decided, then Ro 15:27. ἐλεύθερος γὰρ ὤν though I am free, then 1 Cor 9:19 (cp. vs. 1). Sim. 2 Cor 5:4. Many questions w. γάρ have both inferential and causal force.—S. τοιγαροῦν.—CBird, Some γάρ Clauses in St Mark’s Gospel: JTS n.s. 4, ’53, 171–87.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γάρ

  • 16 δή

    δή, prop. a temporal Particle (cf. ἤδη),
    A at this or that point: hence, now, then, already, or at length:
    I in [dialect] Ep. (rarely Lyr.) sts. at the beginning of a sentence or clause,

    Τεῦκρε πέπον, δὴ νῶϊν ἀπέκτατο πιστὸς ἑταῖρος Il.15.437

    ;

    δὴ πάμπαν ἀποίχεαι ἀνδρὸς ἑῆος 19.342

    ;

    δὴ γὰρ μέγα νεῖκος ὄρωρεν 13.122

    ; δὴ τότε, δή ῥα τότε, 1.476, 13.719, al., cf. Pi.O.3.25, A.Th. 214 (lyr.): but usu. second (or nearly so), freq. with Numerals and temporal Particles,

    ὀκτὼ δὴ προέηκα.. ὀϊστούς Il. 8.297

    ; ἐννέα δὴ βεβάασι.. ἐνιαυτοί full nine years, 2.134; ἕκτον δὲ δὴ τόδ' ἦμαρ this is just the sixth day, E.Or.39, cf. Il.24.107, etc.: also after Advbs. of Time, πολλάκι δή many a time and oft, often ere now, 19.85;

    ὀψὲ δὲ δή 7.94

    ;

    τρὶς δή Pi.P.9.91

    ; πάλαι δή, Lat. jamdudum, S.Ph. 806; νῦν δή just now, Ar.Av. 923 (freq. written νυνδή, Pl.Tht. 145b, etc.); νῦν τε καὶ ἄλλοτε δή ib. 187d; now at length, Id.R. 353a, etc.; τότε δή at that very time, Th.1.49, etc.; αὐτίκα δὴ μάλα this very instant, Pl.R. 338b, etc.; ὕστερον δή yet later, Th.2.17: freq. with temporal Conjunctions, ἐπεὶ δή (written ἐπειδή, q. v.), etc.
    II without temporal significance, as a Particle of emphasis, in fact, of course, certainly, ναὶ δή, ἦ δή, Il.1.286, 518, etc.; οὐ δή surely not, S.Ph. 246, cf. E.Or. 1069, etc.; δῆλα δή, v. δῆλος; with Verbs,

    δὴ γὰρ ἴδον ὀφθαλμοῖσι Il.15.488

    ;

    νῦν δὲ ὁρᾶτε δή X.Cyr. 3.2.12

    ;

    καὶ ἴστε δὴ οἷος.. Pl.Ap. 21a

    : less freq. with Substs., σοφιστὴν δή τοι ὀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα εἶναι they call the man a sophist as you know, Id.Prt. 311e: with Conjunctions, ἵνα δή, ὡς δή, Il.23.207, 5.24, etc.;

    ὅπως δή Th.5.85

    ; γὰρ δή for manifestly, A.Ch. 874, 891, Pl.Tht. 156c;

    οὐ γὰρ δή S.OC 265

    : hence with a part. representing Conjunction and Verb, ἅτε δὴ ἐόντες since they evidently are, Hdt. 8.90; but ὡς φόνον νίζουσα δή as though she were.., E.IT 1338, cf. Hdt.1.66, X.Cyr.5.4.4, etc.; and so, ironically,

    ὡς δή Il.1.110

    , Ar.V. 1315, Eq. 693, Pl.Prt. 342c, al.; freq. with

    σύ, ὡς δὴ σύ μοι τύραννος Ἀργείων ἔσῃ A.Ag. 1633

    , cf. S.OC 809, E.Andr. 235, etc.; also ἵνα δή .. Pl.R. 420e, Men. 86d;

    ὅτι δή.. Id.Phdr. 268d

    ; also εἰσήγαγε τὰς ἑταιρίδας δή the pretended courtesans, X.HG5.4.6, cf. E. Ion 1181, Th.4.67,6.80.
    2 freq. placed immediately after Pronouns, ἐμὲ δή me of all persons, Hdt.3.155; σὺ δή you of all persons, Id.1.115, S.Aj. 1226; οὗτος δή this and no other, Hdt.1.43;

    ὑμεῖς δὲ κεῖνοι δὴ οἵ.. S.Tr. 1091

    ; οὗτος δὴ ὁ Σωκράτης, ironically, Pl.Tht. 166a; τὸ λεγόμενον δὴ τοῦτο as the well-known saying goes, Id.Grg. 514e, cf. E.Hipp. 962; δή τις some one you know of, Pl.Phd. 108c, al.: with possess. Pronouns,

    τὸ σὸν δὴ τοῦτο Pl.Smp. 221b

    , cf. Grg. 5c8d, etc.: with relatives,

    ὃς δὴ νῦν κρατέει Il.21.315

    ;

    τὰ δὴ καὶ ἐγένετο Hdt.1.22

    ; οἷος δὴ σύ just such as thou, Il.24.376, cf. Od.1.32, S.Aj. 995, etc.;

    ὅσα δή Ar.Ach.1

    , etc.: with Adjs., οἴη δή, μοῦνος δή, Od.12.69, Hdt.1.25;

    ἐν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν X.An.3.1.2

    : freq. with Superlatives,

    μάχη ἐγένετο πλείστου δὴ χρόνου μεγίστη δὴ τῶν Ἑλληνικῶν Th.5.74

    ;

    ἁπάντων δὴ ἄλγιστον S.Aj. 992

    , etc.
    III to mark a transition, with or without inference, so, then,

    νίκη μὲν δὴ φαίνετ'.. Il.3.457

    ;

    τὴν μὲν δὴ τυραννίδα οὕτω ἔσχον Hdt.1.14

    ;

    τοῦτο δὴ τὸ ἄγος οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐκέλευον ἐλαύνειν Th.1.127

    .
    IV with Indef. Particles, v. δήποθεν, δήποτε, δήπω, δήπουθεν: with interrogatives,

    τοῦ δὴ ἕνεκα; Pl.Grg. 457e

    ;

    τίδὲδή..; Id.Phd. 58c

     (simply τί δή; what then? R. 357d);

    πότερα δή; S.Ph. 1235

     (and with Advbs.,

    ποῖ δὴ καὶ πόθεν; Pl.Phdr.

    init.; ποῦ δή; πῇ δή; ib. 228e, Il.2.339, etc.): with Indef. Pronouns, δή strengthens the indef. notion, ἄλλοισιν δὴ ταῦτ' ἐπιτέλλεο others be they who they may, Il.1.295; μηδεὶς δή no one at all, Pl.Tht. 170e; δή τις some one or other, Id.R. 498a (pl.), etc. (rarely

    τις δή E.IT 946

    ); the neut. δή τι is common, ἦ ἄρα δή τι ἐΐσκομεν ἄξιον εἶναι; in any way, whatever it be, Il.13.446;

    τὸ ἱππικόν, τῷ δή τι καὶ ἐπεῖχε ἐλλάμψεσθαι Hdt.1.80

    ;

    οὕτω δή τι Id.3.108

    , etc.;

    θεῶν ὅτεῳ δή

     whosoever it be,

    Id.1.86

    ; ἐπὶ μισθῷ ὅσῳ δή, Lat. quantocumque, ib. 160, etc.;

    οἵα δή γε.. E.Heracl. 632

    , cf. Supp. 162; but

    θαυμαστὰ δὴ ὅσα Pl.Smp. 220b

    ;

    ὡς δή Il.5.24

    , etc.; so almost, = ἤδη, ἀναπέτομαι δὴ πρὸς Ὄλυμπον Anacr.24;

    καὶ δὴ φίλον τις ἔκταν' ἀγνοίας ὕπο A. Supp. 499

    ;

    ἤκουσα δή S.Ant. 823

    ;

    πάθη μὲν οὖν δὴ πόλλ' ἔγωγ' ἐκλαυσάμην Id.Tr. 153

    ; οἶσθα μὲν δή ib. 627; so καὶ δή already, in fact, freq. not at the beginning of the sentence,

    κεῖται καὶ δὴ πάνθ' ἅπερ εἶπας Ar.Ec. 514

    , cf. Nu. 906, Theoc.5.83; but

    καὶ δή σφε λείπω A.Supp. 507

    .
    2 to continue a narrative, freq. after μέν, then, so,

    τότε μὲν δὴ.. ἡσυχίην εἶχε Hdt.1.11

    ; Σόλων μὲν δὴ ἔνεμε ib. 32; τὸν μὲν δὴ πέμπει ib. 116; alone, εἷς δὴ τούτων.. <*> one of these.., ib. 114, etc.: freq. in summing up, τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα, Lat. haec hactenus, A.Pr. 500, cf. Hdt.1.14, Th.2.4;

    τούτων δὴ ἕνεκα X. Cyr.3.2.28

    , etc.; in summing up numbers, γίγνονται δὴ οὗτοι χίλιοι these then amount to 1, 000, ib.1.5.5; in resuming after a parenthesis,

    Ἀνδρομάχη, θυγάτηρ μεγαλήτορος Ἠετίωνος.., τοῦ περ δὴ θυγάτηρ Il.6.395

    ;

    οὗτος δὴ.., ὁ μὲν δή Hdt.1.43

    .
    b with imper. and subj.,

    μὴ δὴ.. ἐπιέλπεο Il.1.545

    , cf. 5.684, etc.;

    χωρῶμεν δὴ πάντες S.Ph. 1469

    ; ἐννοεῖτε γὰρ δή for do but consider, X.Cyr.4.3.5; ἄγε δή, φέρε δή, ἴθι δή, σκόπει δή, λέγε δή, Pl.Sph. 235a, Phd. 63b, Sph. 224c, Phd. 80a, Prt. 312c.
    4 καὶ δή and what is more, adding an emphatic statement, Il.1.161, 15.251, Hdt.5.67, Lys.13.4; in Prose, freq.

    καὶ δὴ καί.., ἐς Αἴγυπτον ἀπίκετο.., καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐς Σάρδις Hdt.1.30

    , etc.; καὶ δὴ καὶ νῦν τί φῄς; and now what do you say? Pl.Tht. 187c; καὶ δὴ μὲν οὖν παρόντα yes, and actually here present, S.OC31; esp. in a series, ὑγίεια καὶ ἰσχὺς καὶ κάλλος καὶ πλοῦτος δή and of course riches, Pl.Men. 87e, cf. Tht. 159c, R. 367d; εἴτ'.. εἴτ'.. εἴτεδή ib. 493d.
    b καὶ δή is also used in answers, ἦ καὶ παρέστη κἀπὶ τέρμ' ἀφίκετο; Answ. καὶ δὴ 'πὶ δισσαῖς ἦν.. πύλαις yes, he was even so far as.., S.Aj.49; βλέψον κάτω. Answ. καὶ δὴ βλέπω well, I am looking, Ar. Av. 175, cf. Pax 327, Pl. 227 sq., S.El. 317 sq., 1436, etc.; πρόσθιγέ νύν μου. Answ.

    ψαύω καὶ δή S.OC 173

    ; without καί, ἀποκρίνου περὶ ὧν ἂν ἐρωτῶ. Answ.

    ἐρώτα δή Pl.Tht. 157d

    ; ἐρώτα. Answ.

    ἐρωτῶ δή Id.Grg. 448b

    .
    c in assumptions or suppositions, καὶ δὴ δέδεγμαι and now suppose I have accepted, A.Eu. 894, cf. Ch. 565, E.Med. 386, Hel. 1059, not found in S., once in Ar.V. 1224.
    5 δή in apodosi, after εἰ or ἐάν, Il.5.898, Hdt.1.108, Pl.R. 524e, etc.; after ὅτε, ἡνίκα, even then, S.Ant. 170 sq., El. 954; after ἐπεί, ἐπειδάν, X.Cyr.1.6.14, Pl. Cra. 435e, etc.; after ὡς, X.Cyr.7.2.4;

    ἐν ᾧ δὲ ταῦτα ἐβουλεύοντο, καὶ δὴ ὁ βασιλεύς..

     already,

    Id.An.1.10.10

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δή

  • 17 ὁρίζω

    ὁρίζω, [dialect] Ion. [pref] οὐρ- Hdt. (v. infr.): [tense] fut.
    A

    ὁριῶ Arist.Cat. 5b5

    , ([etym.] δι-) Isoc. 4.174 : [tense] aor.

    ὥρισα S.Ant. 452

    , Pl.Lg. 864e ; [dialect] Ion.

    οὔρισα Hdt.3.142

     : [tense] pf.

    ὥρικα D.26.24

    , Arist.Mete. 382a19 :—[voice] Med., [tense] fut.

    - ιοῦμαι Pl.Tht. 190e

    , Lg. 737d: [tense] aor.

    ὡρισάμην Id.Tht. 148a

    , Epicr.11.18, etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.

    ὁρισθήσομαι Pl.Tht. 158d

    : [tense] aor.

    ὡρίσθην Id.Chrm. 171a

    : [tense] pf.

    ὥρισμαι Th.1.71

    , Pl.Smp. 182a, etc.; but in med. sense, E.Hec. 801, D.31.5 : ([etym.] ὅρος):— divide or separate from, as a border or boundary, c.acc. et dat.,

    ὁ Νεῖλος ὁ τὴν Ἀσίην οὐρίζων τῇ Λιβύῃ Hdt.2.16

     : c. acc. et gen., S.Ph. 636 :—[voice] Pass.,

    θύρᾳ βαλανωτῇ ὡρισμένην ἀπὸ τῆς ἀνδρωνίτιδος X.Oec. 9.5

     ; or
    b with two accs. joined by καί, separate,

    [λίμνη] οὐρίζει τήν τε Σκυθικὴν καὶ τὴν Νευρίδα γῆν Hdt.4.51

    , cf. 56,7.123, Arist.HA 501b16, OGI335.112 (Pergam., ii B. C.), Lyc.1289, etc.;

    ἐὰν.. κύκλος.. ὁρίζῃ τό τε ἀφανὲς καὶ τὸ φανερὸν ἡμισφαίριον Autol.Sph.4

     : hence

    ὁρίζων κύκλος Id.1.1

     ; v. ὁρίζων.
    2 bound,

    τὴν ἀρχὴν ὥριζεν αὐτῷ ἡ Ἐρυθρὰ θάλαττα X.Cyr.8.6.21

     ;

    τὰ δὲ πρὸς Τριβαλλοὺς.. Τρῆρες ὥριζον Th.2.96

     ; of a line (or surface) as limiting a surface (or solid), Arist. Metaph. 1017b17:—[voice] Pass.,

    Εὔβοια.. ὅροις ὑγροῖσιν ὡρισμένη E. Ion 295

     : metaph., ὡρίσθω μέχρι τοῦδε so far let it go and no further, Th.1.71.
    3 pass between or through,

    διδύμους πέτρας E.Med. 433

     (lyr.).
    4 part, divide,

    χειμὼν ἄλλοσ' ἄλλον ὥρισεν Id.Hel. 128

     ; ὁ. τινὰ ἀπὸ.. banish one from.., Id.Hec. 941 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., ματρὸς ἐκ χερῶν ὁ. depart from.., Id. Ion 1459(lyr.), but very dub. in Ar.Ec. 202; cf. ἐξορίζω (A) 11, 111.
    II mark out by boundaries, mark out,

    βωμὸν ἱδρύσατο καὶ τέμενος περὶ αὐτὸν οὔρισε Hdt.3.142

    , cf. 6.108, S.Tr. 754, E.Hel. 1670, IG12.76.54, 42(1).76.19 ([voice] Pass., Epid., ii B.C.), etc.; v. infr. IV. 1: metaph., ὁ. τι ἔς τι limit one thing according to another, Th.3.82.
    2 trace out as a boundary, πόρον (of 10 tracing out the Bosporus), A.Supp. 546 (lyr.).
    III ordain, determine, lay down, αἶσα τόνδε σοὐρίζει (i.e. σοι ὁρίζει)

    μόρον Id.Ch. 927

     ( σοι πορίζει M1, σ' ὁ. M2) ;

    ἡμῖν ὥρισεν σωτηρίαν E.IT 979

     ;

    ἐς τήνδε παῖδα ψῆφον ὥρισαν φόνου Id.Hec. 259

     ;

    ἡ Δίκη.. ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ὥρισεν νόμους S.Ant. 452

     ;

    [τὸν χρόνον] ὁ νόμος ὁ. Pl.Lg. 864e

     ;

    ἀριθμὸς ὁ ὁρίζων τὸ πολὺ καὶ τὸ ὀλίγον X.An.7.7.36

     ;

    τὸ δοῦλον γένος πρὸς τὴν ἐλάσσω μοῖραν ὥρισεν θεός E.Fr. 218

     ;

    ὁρίσατέ μοι μέχρι πόσων ἐτῶν δεῖ νομίζειν νέους X.Mem.1.2.35

     : c. inf.,

    ἄνακτες ὥρισαν.. θανεῖν ἐμὴν δέσποιναν οὐ ψήφῳ μιᾷ E. Ion 1222

    , cf. S.Fr.24 ; ὁ. τινὰ θεόν determine one to be a god, deify, AP12.158.7 (Mel.) ;

    ὁ. θάνατον εἶναι τὴν ζημίαν Lycurg.65

    , cf. Din.1.61 ([voice] Med.) ;

    θάνατον ὡρικέναι τὴν ζημίαν D.26.24

     :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὧραι ἑκάστοις εἰσὶν ὡρισμέναι Arist.HA 542a19

    , etc.; ἐπί τισι ὡρισμένοις on certain definite terms (cf. ῥητός), Id.Pol. 1285b22 ; ἀρχαὶ ἀριθμῷ ὡρισμέναι limited, definite, opp. ἄπειροι, Id.Metaph. 1002b18 ;

    τόποι ὡ. Id.Cael. 273

     a14 ;

    τὸ ὡρισμένον Id.Mete. 369b29

    .
    2 define a thing, Pl.Chrm. 171a ([voice] Pass.), X.Mem.4.6.4, al.: more freq. in [voice] Med. than [voice] Act., v. infr. IV. 3.
    IV [voice] Med., mark out for oneself, τίνα ὅρον ὁρίζῃ what criterion do you assign, Pl.Grg. 470b ; στήλας ὁ. set up stones as boundary marks, X.An.7.5.13 ;

    ὁ. χθόνα

     take possession of, take to oneself,

    A. Supp. 256

     ;

    γαῖα.. ἣν Πέλοψ ὁρίζεται E.Fr. 696

     ;

    ὁ. ἑαυτῷ μέρος τῆς οὐσίας Lys.17.6

     : with inf. added,

    ἱερὸν ὡρίσαντ' ἔχειν E.IT 969

     ;

    ὁρίζεσθαι βωμούς

     set up,

    S.Tr. 237

     (just like ὁρίζειν ib. 754) ; v. ὕπαστρος.
    2 determine for oneself, get or have a thing determined,

    ἃ ὡρίσω σὺ δίκαια D.19.241

    , cf. v.l. in Lys.2.19 : c. acc. et inf., αὐτὸν πολεμεῖν ὁρίζομαι I lay it down that.., D.9.19 ; τί ποτ' ἄρ' ὡρίσαντο καὶ τίνος γένους εἶναι τὸ φυτόν; Epicr.11.18.
    3 define a thing,

    τὴν ἡδονὴν ἀγαθὸν ὁ. Pl.R. 505c

    , cf.Sph. 246b ;

    ὁ. τὰς ἀρετὰς ἀπαθείας τινάς Arist.EN 1104b24

    , al. ;

    ἡδονῇ τε καὶ ἀγαθῷ ὁ. τὸ καλόν Pl.Grg. 475a

    ;

    τὸ ζῆν ὁ. δυνάμει αἰσθήσεως Arist.EN 1170a16

    , al.: c. acc. et inf.,

    ὁ. δικαίους εἶναι τοὺς εἰδότας κτλ. X.Mem.4.6.6

    , cf. Pl.Tht. 190e, etc.:— [voice] Pass., to be defined,

    [ἡ αἰδὼς] ὁρίζεται φόβος τις ἀδοξίας Arist.EN 1128b11

     ; οἷς αἱ φιλίαι ὁρίζονται ib. 1166a2 ;

    τὸ ὁριζόμενον Id.Top. 141b24

    , al.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁρίζω

  • 18 πόθεν

    πόθεν interrog. adv. (Hom.+) in direct and indir. questions: ‘from where, from which, whence’.
    ① interrogative expression of extension from a local source, from what place? from where? (Hom. et al.; Gen 16:8; 29:4; Tob 7:3; Jos., Ant. 9, 211; 11, 210) Mt 15:33; Mk 8:4 (QQuesnell, The Mind of Mark ’69, 164–68); Lk 13:25, 27 (2 Cl 4:5); J 3:8 and sim. IPhld 7:1 (s. EvdGoltz, Ign. v. Ant. 1894, 134–36); J 4:11; perh. 6:5, but s. 3 below; 8:14ab (πόθεν ἦλθον καὶ ποῦ ὑπάγω. See GWetter, Eine gnost. Formel im vierten Ev.: ZNW 18, 1918, 49–63); 9:29f; 19:9; Rv 7:13. πόθεν αὕτη εἴη ἡ φωνή whence this voice might have come GJs 11:1.—In imagery μνημόνευε πόθεν πέπτωκες remember from what (state) you have fallen Rv 2:5. γινώσκομεν πόθεν ἐλυτρώθημεν we realize from what (state) we have been redeemed B 14:7. πόθεν ἐκλήθημεν 2 Cl 1:2.
    ② interrogative expression of derivation fr. a source, from what source? brought about or given by whom? born of whom? (Hom. et al.; Jos., Vi. 334; Just., A I, 29, 4) Mt 13:27, 54, 56; 21:25; Mk 6:2; Lk 20:7; J 2:9; Js 4:1ab; B 10:12; IEph 19:2; GJs 13:3. πόθεν ἐστίν J 7:27ab could be interpreted in accordance w. 6:42, and then would mean of what kind of parents he was born. But a more general sense is also prob.
    ③ interrogative expression of cause or reason, how, why, in what way? (Aeschyl. et al.) Mk 12:37. In a question expressing surprise (Att.; Jer 15:18) Lk 1:43; GJs 12:2 (πόθεν ἐμοί Plut., Mor. 526f); J 1:48; 6:5 (Field, Notes 91 ‘with what’, s. 1). [π]ό̣θ̣ε̣[ν] ἔ̣χαιτε (=ἔχετε) [το͂ν βασιλέα τοῦτον, ὅτι αὐτῷ πιστεύ]ε̣τε whence do you have this king, so that you believe in him (=whence does your king come, to invite such commitment from you) AcPl Ha 9, 30f.—DELG s.v. πο-. Frisk. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πόθεν

  • 19 σφραγίς

    σφραγίς, ῖδος, ἡ (s. prec. entry; Trag., Hdt.+; ins, pap, LXX; PsS 2:6; TestPs, ParJer; ApcMos 42; Philo; Jos., Ant. 15, 408; 18, 93 al.; loanw. in rabb.) prim. ‘seal, signet’.
    ① the instrument used for sealing or stamping, signet (Aristot., Strabo et al., Appian, Liby. 32 §137; 104 §493, Bell. Civ. 2, 22 §82; pap, LXX; Hippol., Ref. 9, 11, 5) σφραγὶς θεοῦ Rv 7:2 (against power of demons, etc. RCharles, Comm. I 196).
    ② the substance which bears the imprint of a signet and seals a document, seal (ParJer 3:10) GPt 8:33; 1 Cl 43:5. In Rv a book w. seven seals 5:1 (a last will and testament acc. to EHuschke, Das Buch mit sieben Siegeln 1860, Zahn, JWeiss; cp. JMarquardt, Römisches Privatieben2 1886, 805f; TBirt, Die Buchrolle in der Kunst 1907, 243.—On Rv 5f: WSattler, ZNW 20, 1921, 231–40; 21, 1922, 43–53; KStaritz, ibid. 30, ’31, 157–70; WTaylor, JTS 31, 1930, 266–71). λῦσαι τὰς σφραγῖδας Rv 5:2, 5 v.l. (cp. λύω 1a). Also ἀνοῖξαι vs. 5, 9; 6:1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12 (Aeschyl., Eum. 828); 8:1 (ἀνοίγω 4).
    ③ the impression made by a signet, mark (Hdt. et al.; LXX; ApcMos 42) Rv 9:4 (cp. Martial 3, 21, of a slave ‘fronte notata’). In imagery ὁ θεμέλιος τοῦ θεοῦ ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην κτλ. God’s foundation that bears the following mark (= inscription) … 2 Ti 2:19 (s. Dölger, Sphragis 3; Straub 63).—Cp. Hs 8, 2, 4, prob. of a document bearing a mark that permits passage, a pass (cp. Aberciusins. 9 λαὸς λαμπρὰν σφραγεῖδαν ἔχων and the Naasene hymn in Hippol., Ref. 5, 10, 2 σφραγῖδας ἔχων καταβήσομαι; likewise the books of Jeû and the Mandaean wr.; Mani, Kephal. I 225, 13; 15; 18; difft. Leutzsch, Hermas p. 480 n. 201).
    ④ that which confirms or authenticates, attestation, confirmation, certification, fig. ext. of 3
    ⓐ w. the gen. of that which is confirmed or authenticated ἡ σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the certification of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2. σημεῖον ἔλαβεν περιτομῆς σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως he (Abraham) received the sign of circumcision as something that confirms the righteousness through faith that was already present Ro 4:11. σφ. need be no more than a metaphor for attestation or confirmation in περιτέτμηται ὁ λαὸς εἰς σφραγῖδα B 9:6.
    ⓑ as a term for baptism in 2 Cl and Hermas (Theognis ln. 19: the author’s name, as a σφρηγίς [Ionic form], ensures his work against all possibility of falsification): ἡ σφραγίς 2 Cl 7:6; 8:6; Hs 8, 6, 3; 9, 16, 3ff al. ἡ σφ. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 3 (also AcThom 131 [Aa II/2, 239, 3; s. Leutzsch, Hermas p. 483 n. 239]. Cp. ἡ σφ. τοῦ κυρίου Clem. Alex., Quis Div. Salv. 42, 4. ἡ σφ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPh 134 [Aa II/2, 65, 11]; τῆς ἐν κυρίῳ σφραγῖδος AcPl Ha 3, 24; 11, 23 [s. μυέω]; ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ σφ. AcPlTh 25 [Aa I, 253, 7f]; AcThom, end [Aa II/2, 291, 7f]). Used with the verbs διδόναι τινὶ (τὴν σφ.) Hs 9, 16, 5b (AcThom 49 [Aa II/2, 165, 14]; s. also 27 [Aa II/2, 142f]). λαμβάνειν 8, 6, 3; 9, 16, 3; 9, 17, 4. ἔχειν 9, 16, 5a; 7; κηρύσσειν 9, 16, 4b. τεθλακέναι 8, 6, 3. τηρεῖν 2 Cl 7:6; 8:6= τηρεῖν τὸ βάπτισμα 6:9 (δέχεσθαι AcThom 26 [Aa II/2, 141, 14]; περιτιθέναι Celsus in Origen, C. Cels. 2, 96f).—GAnrich, Das Antike Mysterienwesen 1894, 120ff; GWobbermin, Religionsgesch. Studien 1896, 144ff; ASeeberg, Der Katechismus der Urchristenheit 1903, 232ff; FDölger, Sphragis als Taufbez. 1911, 49ff, Ac I 1929, 88–91; AvStromberg, Studien zur Theorie u. Praxis der Taufe 1913, 89ff; WHeitmüller, ΣΦΡΑΓΙΣ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 40ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 227ff; FPreisigke, Die Gotteskraft der frühchristl. Zeit 1922, 25f; EMaass, Segnen, Weihen, Taufen: ARW 21, 1922, 241ff; JYsebaert, Greek Baptismal Terminol., ’62, 204f.—Kl. Pauly V 309; OEANE IV 509–12; DBS XII 66–228 esp. 213–28 on NT; BHHW III 1786–90.—DELG. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σφραγίς

  • 20 τις

    τις, [full] τι, Indef. Pron.
    A any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions v. infr.):—but τίς; τί; Interrog. Pron. who? what?, oxyt. in the monosyll. cases, parox. in the others:—Dialectal forms: Cypr. σις ( si se) Inscr.Cypr.135.10 H.; Arc. σις (with <*> for ς) IG5(2).262.25 (Mantinea, v B.C.); Thess. κις ib.9(2).515.12 ([place name] Larissa), 1226.4, 1229.27 ([place name] Phalanna), pl. κινες ib.517.41 ([place name] Larissa), neut. κι in διεκί, ποκκί (qq.v.); neut. pl. [dialect] Dor. σά, [dialect] Boeot. τά, [dialect] Aeol. dat. τίω, τίοισι (v. infr. B). (I.-E. q[uglide]i-, cf. Lat. quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, v. ἄσσα, σά μάν; with τέο (v. infr. B) cf. OSlav. gen. c<*>eso.)
    A Indef. Pron. τις, τι, gen. [dialect] Ion. τεο Od.16.305, Hdt.1.58; more freq. τευ Il.2.388, al., Hdt.4.30, al., Meliss.7, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att. του A.Pr.21, Ar.Ach. 329, Th.1.70, etc. (sts. fem., S.Aj. 290, OT 1107 (lyr.), E.Hec. 370, etc.); του is rare after 300 B.C., never in LXX or NT, but found in IG12(5).798.17 (Tenos, iii B.C.), PCair.Zen.250.6, 647.23 (iii B.C.), Plb.3.23.3, revived by the Atticists, D.H.8.29, Plu.Fab.20, etc.; τινος Pi.P.2.90, IG12.16.17, 65.41, A.Eu. 5, Ch. 102, S.Ant. 698, al., Hdt.2.109, al. (Rh.Mus.72.483), etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion.

    τεῳ Il.16.227

    , Od.11.502, Hdt.2.48, 5.86; Trag. and [dialect] Att. τῳ (also in Hom., Il.1.299, 12.328, Od.13.308, 20.297, al., always in masc.) A.Th. 1045, IG12.39.54, D.S.18.45; as fem., A.Th. 472, S. OT80, etc.; τινι (Hom. in the form

    οὔ τινι Il.17.68

    , Od.14.96) Pi. O.9.26, al., B.17.12, Hdt.1.114 (elsewh. fem., 2.62, 3.69, 83, 4.113), A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 443, 495, etc.; acc. τινα Il.1.62, 5.761, etc., neut. τι 2.122, etc.: dual τινε Od.4.26, Pl.Sph. 237d, Prm. 143c, 149e: pl. τινες (Hom. only in

    οὔ τινες Od.6.279

    , 17.587 and οἵτινες (v. ὅστις)); [dialect] Dor. τινεν SIG527.127 (Drerus, iii B.C.); nom. and acc. neut. τινα (

    ὅτινα Il.22.450

    ), never in Trag., Ar., Th., or Hdt., f.l. in Isoc.4.74, first in Pl.Chrm. 163d, Ep. 325a, D.47.63, Hyp.Ath.19, Alex.110, Sotad.Com.1.22, Arist.EN 1094a5, IG42(1).121.35 (Epid., iv B.C.), etc.; ἄσσα (q.v.) Od.19.218, never in Trag. or Hdt.; [dialect] Att. ἄττα first in Th.1.113, 2.100, Ar.Ra. 173, al., Pl.R. 400a, etc., never in LXX, Plb., D.S., Str., revived by the Atticists, D.H.Comp.3, etc.; gen. [dialect] Ion. τεων Hdt.2.175, 5.57, τεῶν cj. for γε ῶν in 4.76; τινων not in Hdt., first in Ar.Eq. 977 (lyr.); dat. τισι, τισιν, first in Hdt. 9.113, X.Ath.1.18; N.-W. [dialect] Dor. τινοις GDI1409.5 (Delph., iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. τεοισι Hdt.8.113, 9.27 (for τεοις and τεον v. τεός); acc. τινας Il.15.735, Od.11.371 (also in οὕστινας, ὅτινας, v. ὅστις), etc.; neut. τινα (v. supr.):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as Adj. any, some, and serving as the Indef. Art. a, an;

    θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις Il.5.191

    ;

    καί τις θεὸς ἡγεμόνευεν Od.9.142

    ; οὐδέ τις αὐτὸν ἠείδη δμώων ib. 205; ἤ τι ὀϊσάμενος, ἢ.. ib. 339; μή τίς μοι ὑποδείσας ἀναδύη ib. 377, cf. 405- 410; εἴ τινά που μετ' ὄεσσι λάβοι ib. 418, cf. 421, al.; τις θεός construed as if τις θεῶν, 19.40, cf. 11.502, IG12.94.19, E.Hel. 1039.
    II special usages:
    1 some one (of many), i.e. many a one,

    ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν Il.7.201

    , etc.: sts. with meiosis, implying all or men, 13.638, Od.3.224; so in Prose, Hdt.5.49 fin., Th.2.37, etc.
    2 any one concerned, every one,

    εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω Il.2.382

    ; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself, 17.254;

    ἵνα τις στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος 8.515

    , cf. 16.209, 17.227, al.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., even with the imper., τοῦτό τις.. ἴστω S Aj.417 (lyr.), cf. E.Ba. 346, Ar.Av. 1187;

    ἀγορεύω τινὶ ἐμὲ μὴ βασανίζειν Id.Ra. 628

    ; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, Th.1.40, cf. 6.77;

    ὅ τί τις ἐδύνατο Id.7.75

    ; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, D.21.66, cf. 19.35:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words,

    τις ἕκαστος Od.9.65

    , Th.6.31, etc.;

    πᾶς τις A.Ag. 1205

    , Hdt.6.80, Th.8.94, etc.;

    ἅπας τις Hdt.3.113

    , etc.;

    οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον Id.4.118

    . In these senses, τις is freq. combined with pl. words, οἱ κακοὶ.. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, S.Aj. 965; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, Th.4.85;

    ἐτόλμα τις.., ὁρῶντες Id.2.53

    , cf. 7.75; esp. after εἴ or ἤν τις, X. Mem.1.2.62, al.
    3 in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) Id.An.1.4.12, cf. Ar.Ra. 552, Theoc.5.122; so also euphem. for something bad,

    ἤν τι ποιῶμεν Th.2.74

    ;

    ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11

    : hence for the [ per.] 1st or [ per.] 2nd pers. Pron.,

    ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω Il.1.289

    , cf. S.Ant. 751; ποῖ τις τρέψεται; for ποῖ τρέψομαι; Ar.Th. 603, cf. S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), 1138, Th.4.59, X.An.3.4.40, 5.7.31, etc.
    4 indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sts. with an ironical force,

    φοβεῖταί τις A.Ch.59

     (lyr.);

    μισεῖ τις ἐκεῖνον D.4.8

    ; as voc., τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, Ar.Pl. 1196.
    5 τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, E.El. 939;

    εἰσὶν ὅμως τινὲς οἱ εὐδοκιμοῦντες Arist.Pol. 1293b13

    ;

    τὸ δοκεῖν τιν' εἶναι Men.156

    ;

    τὸ δοκεῖν τινὲς εἶναι D.21.213

    ;

    ὡς σὲ μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει δεῖ τινὰ φαίνεσθαι, τὴν πόλιν δ' ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μηδενὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι Id.10.71

    ; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, Theoc.11.79, cf. Act.Ap.5.36; also in neut.,

    οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι Pl.Ap. 41e

    , cf.Phd. 63c, Phdr. 243a, Euthd. 303c, etc.:— so τι λέγειν to be near the mark, opp. οὐδὲν λέγειν, Id.Prt. 339c, R. 329e, Phdr. 260a, etc.;

    ἵνα καὶ εἰδῶμεν εἴ τι ὅδε λέγει Id.Cra. 407e

    ;

    οἴεσθέ τι ποιεῖν, οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες Id.Smp. 173c

    .
    b τις is sts. opp. to another word,

    ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί.., τέρπεται δὲ καί τις.. Pi.Fr. 221

    ;

    τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀποροῦσι συνεξέδωκε θυγατέρας.., τοὺς δ' ἐλύσατο ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων Lys.19.59

    ;

    μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον LXX Da.2.33

     (more freq. with the Article, v. infr. 10 c); ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codd. BT)

    αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν Pl.Cra. 412c

    ;

    ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι πᾶσι τοῖς πολίταις ἀποδίδοσθαι πάσας ταύτας τὰς κρίσεις ἢ τισὶ πάσας.. ἢ τινὰς μὲν αὐτῶν πᾶσι τινὰς δὲ τισίν Arist.Pol. 1298a9

    , cf. 1277a23; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ' ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, Id.Cat. 6a38;

    τὸ πρώτως ὂν καὶ οὐ τὶ ὂν ἀλλ' ὂν ἁπλῶς Id.Metaph. 1028a30

    ; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισίν; Id.Pol. 1269a26.
    6 with pr. names τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so,

    ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης Il.5.9

    , cf. X.An.3.1.4, etc.; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, S.Ph. 442.
    b one of the same sort, converting the pr. name into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, A.Ag.55 (anap.); [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyr.in PVat.11v xi7;

    Σκύλλαν τινά A.Ag. 1233

    , cf.Ar.V. 181, Av. 512, Ra. 912: so also

    ὥς τις ἥλιος A.Ag. 288

    ; ἰσθμόν τιν' Ar. Th. 647.
    7 with Adjs. τις combines to express the idea of a Subst. used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, Od.17.449, cf. 18.382, 20.140, Il.3.220; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dull ard, Pl.R. 358a, cf. Prt. 340e; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a cow ard, A.Pr. 696, cf. Th. 979(lyr.), Ag. 1140 (lyr.); ὡς ταχεῖά τις.. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion ( = ταχέως πως), S.Aj. 1266, cf. OT 618, Hdt.4.198; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, Id.3.155, 5.33.
    8 with numerals and Adjs. expressing number, size, or the like , εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ.. ἔστω some one man, Il.1.144;

    ἕνα τιν' ἂν καθεῖσεν Ar.Ra. 911

    ;

    δώσει δέ τι ἕν γε φέρεσθαι Od.15.83

    ;

    τινὰ μίαν νύκτα Th.6.61

    ;

    προσκαλεσάμενός τινας δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν Act.Ap.23.23

    ; sts. the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, Th.7.34;

    ἐς διακοσίους τινάς Id.3.111

    , cf. 7.87, 8.21; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, Id.3.52; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, Id.8.3; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, Id.3.68; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, A.Pers. 510, Th. 6.94, etc.; ὀλίγοι τινές or

    τινὲς ὀλίγοι Id.2.17

    , 3.7; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, Hdt.5.48;

    τις στρατιὰ οὐ πολλή Th.6.61

    ; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, Od.10.45, cf. Hdt. 1.193, 2.18, etc.;

    κόσοι τινές Id.7.234

    ;

    πηλίκαι τινὲς τιμωρίαι Isoc. 20.3

    ;

    πολλὸς γάρ τις ἔκειτο Il.7.156

    ;

    ἐκ πολλοῦ τευ χρόνου Hdt. 2.58

    .
    9 with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς.. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, Od.20.38, cf. 380; οἷός τις what sort of a man, Il.5.638 (dub. l.), cf. Od.9.348, 20.377, Pl.Prt. 313a, etc.;

    ποῖός τις S.Ant.42

    , OC 1163, Hdt.3.34, X.An.7.6.24, etc.;

    ὁποῖός τις Id.Cyr.2.2.2

    , al.;

    εὐτυχίη τις τοιήδε Hdt.3.139

    , cf. X.Mem.1.1.1, etc.;

    τοιοῦτός τις Id.An.5.8.7

    .
    10 with the Article,
    a when a noun with the Art. is in appos. with τις, as ὅταν δ' ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, S.OC 289; τοὺς αὐτοέντας.. τιμωρεῖν τινας (v.l. τινα) Id.OT 107.
    b in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Art. to show that the Art. is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opp. ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, Arist.Cat. 1b4, 8; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opp. ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, Id.Pol. 1283a4, cf. S.E.P.2.223; but in

    ἑνὸς γὰρ τό γε τὶ φήσεις σημεῖον εἶναι Pl.Sph. 237d

    , the Art. is used as in Il. cc. s.v. ὁ, ἡ

    , τό B.1.5

    : later ὅ τις (or ὁ τὶς ) much like ὁ δεῖνα, δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, PMag.Par.1.236; αἴρω σε, ἥ τις βοτάνη ib.287; εἰς τήν τινα κρείαν (leg. χρείαν) ib.289.
    c freq. in opposed clauses,

    ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δὲ.. E.Med. 1141

    , Hec. 624, Pl.Phd. 99b, etc.;

    ὁ μέν τις.., ἄλλος δὲ.. E.IT 1407

    ;

    ὁ μὲν.., ὁ δέ τις.. X.Cyr.1.4.15

    : pl.,

    οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.. Hdt.1.127

    , cf. Th.2.91;

    οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.., οἱ δέ τινες X.Cyr.3.2.10

    , etc.; οἱ μὲν.., οἱ δέ τινες.. ib.6.1.26, etc.: also combined with other alternative words,

    ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.., ἕτερος δέ τις.. Id.Smp.2.6

    ; ὁ μὲν.., ἕτερος δέ τις.., ὁ δὲ.. , etc., Ar. Pl. 162 sq.: also in neut.,

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Pl.Ep. 358a

    ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δὲ.. Hdt.3.40

    ; in adverb. sense, τὸ μὲν.., τὸ δέ τι.. partly.., partly.., Plb.1.73.4; and τι remains unaltered even when the Art. is pl.,

    τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι X.An.4.1.14

    , cf. HG7.1.46; also τὸ δέ τι.. but in some measure.., without τὸ μέν preceding, Th.1.107, cf. 118, 7.48.
    d later τις is used as in b supr. but without the Art., γράψον.. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, POxy.937.22 (iii A.D.); κληρονόμους καταλείπω τὴν θυγατέρα μού τινα καὶ τὸν σύντροφον αὐτῆς τινα καί τινα ib.1034.2 (ii A.D.); τίς τινι χαίρειν A to B greeting (in a draft letter), ib. 509 (ii A.D.).
    II the neut. τι is used,
    a collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party.., Th.7.48; so perh. τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ' Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ' ἀνθρώπων no class, h.Ven.34 (but masc. τις in h.Merc. 143).
    b euphem. for something bad, v. supr. 3.
    c joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all,

    ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι Il.5.421

    ;

    παρεθάρρυνέ τι αὐτούς X.HG6.4.7

    , etc.: with Adjs. or Adverbs, οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, οὕτω δή τι πολύγονον, etc., Hdt.3.12, 108, cf. 4.52; so also

    ὀλίγον τι ἧσσον Od.15.365

    ;

    οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον Hdt.6.123

    , etc.;

    ἧσσόν τι Th.3.75

    , etc.; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, v. πάνυ 1.3,

    πολύς 111.1a

    , 2a, σχεδόν IV; also in conjunction with

    οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως Hdt.6.3

    ; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, E.Alc. 522, S.Aj. 280;

    μηδέν τι λίαν E.Andr. 1234

    :—also καί τι καὶ.. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, Th.1.107;

    καί πού τι καί Pi.O.1.28

    .
    12 τίς τε freq. in Hom.,

    ὡς ὅτε τίς τε Il.3.33

    , 4.141, v. τε B.
    13 ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, Hdt.3.140, X.Cyr.7.5.45, D.C.47.5, 48.4; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, Pl.Ap. 17b;

    ἢ οὐδεὶς ἤ τις D.C.41.62

     (s. v.l.).
    14 τις is pleonast. in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, v. supr. 11c.
    b repeated in successive clauses,

    ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει S.Ant. 689

    ;

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται Id.Tr. 944

     (where however κἄτι πλείους is prob. cj.), cf. E.Or. 1218 (whereas τις is sts. omitted in the first clause,

    οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν A.Pr.21

    , cf. S.Tr.3): but in E.Andr. 734, ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω.. πόλις τις, the repetition is pleonastic, as also in A.Supp.57 sq. (lyr., s. v.l.).
    15 τις is sts. omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (sc. τις) Il.13.287; ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (sc. τις)

    φεύγοντα διώκειν 22.199

    , cf. S.OC 1226 (lyr.), Leg.Gort.2.2, X.Smp.5.2, Pl.Grg. 456d: τις must often be supplied from what goes before, ib. 478c, Prt. 319d.
    b sts. also τις is omitted before a gen. case which must depend upon it, as

    ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς S.Aj. 189

     (lyr.); ἢν γαμῇ ποτ' αὐτὸς ἢ [τις]

    τῶν ξυγγενῶν Ar.Nu. 1128

    ;

    ἐν τῶν πόλεων IG12.56.14

    .--Cf. ὅστις, οὔτις, μήτις, ἄλλο τι.
    1 accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc., cf. Choerob. in Theod.1.373 H.) and barytone when followed by another word ( τὶς or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to Sch. D.T.p.240 H. its orthotone accent is τίς (not τὶς) , τίνα, τίνες, etc. The orthotone form is used in codd.:
    a at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον.. ; is any one within? A.Ch. 654 ( τὶς cj. Hermann); τί φημι; = λέγω τι; am I saying anything? S.Tr. 865, OT 1471; <τίς ἦλθε;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? Somebody has come, Sch.D.T. l.c.; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), S.E.M.8.97; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας Sch.Theoc.7.78;

    τίς ποτε οἰκοδεσπότης.. ἐκοπία Aesop.

     in Gloss. iii p.41; or after a pause,

    πῶς γὰρ ἄν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ βέλτιστε, τὶς ἀποκρίναιτο Pl.R. 337e

    ; τι οὖν ([etym.] τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγεις; D.1.14 (v.l.);

    ἔντοσθεν δὲ γυνά, τι θεῶν δαίδαλμα Theoc.1.32

    ;

    οὐ γυμνὸν τὸ φίλαμα, τι δ' ὦ ξένε καὶ πλέον ἑξεῖς Mosch.1.5

     (v.l. for τὺ).
    b when τις is opp. to another τις or to some other word,

    τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ' οὐ συμφέρει Arist.Pol. 1284b40

    , cf. Th.2.92, Pl.Cri. 49a, D. 9.2;

    τινὲς μὲν οὖν.., ἡμεῖς δὲ.. Sor.1.1

    ;

    τὸ τὶ μὲν ψεῦδος ἔχον, τὶ δὲ ἀληθές S.E.M.8.127

    ;

    ἀλλὰ τινὰ μὲν.., τινὰ δὲ.. Gem.14.6

    ;

    ποτὲ μὲν πρὸς πάντα, ποτὲ δὲ πρὸς τινά Sor.1.48

    : without such opposition, τοῦτ' εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεται τινί for a certain person, S.Aj. 1138. Codd. are not consistent; in signf.11.5a, 10c, 13 they make it enclitic; in signf. 11.5b sts. enclitic, sts. orthotone (v. supr.); sts. enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence,

    πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί Arist.Metaph. 1032a14

    , cf. Pl.Chrm. 165c.
    2 position:
    a τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (v. supr. 111.1a, b); it may stand second word,

    ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ Od.9.508

    , cf. Il.8.515, 23.331; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense,

    ἀλλ' ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν 1.62

    ;

    φυλακὴ δέ τις ἔμπεδος ἔστω 8.521

    .
    b in [dialect] Ion. Prose it sts. stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive,

    τῶν τις Περσέων Hdt.1.85

    ;

    τῶν τις ἱρέων Id.2.38

    ;

    τῶν τινες Φοινίκων Id.8.90

    ;

    ἐς τῶν τι ἄλλο στομάτων τοῦ Νείλου Id.2.179

    ; so also in late Prose, Ath.3.108d, Eust.1402.18, 1659.27, 1676.1.
    c it stands between the Art. and Subst. in signf.11.10b.
    d τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, IG12.110.46, Th.7.10, X.An.4.1.14 (codd. dett.), D.22.22, etc.
    e whereas in [dialect] Att. the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in [dialect] Dor. the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, Leg.Gort.9.43, al., Tab.Heracl.1.105, al. (but

    αἴ κά τις Epich.35

    , 159;

    αἰ δέ κα μή τις Leg.Gort.5.13

    ): later [dialect] Dor.

    εἴ τί κα GDI2101.3

    , al.; καἴ τι ἂν ( = καὶ εἴ τι ἂν) IG5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., v. infr. B.11.1b):—this [dialect] Dor. order influenced the Koine, as in the rare

    εἴ τις ἂν Plu.TG15

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τις

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • mark you — old fashioned phrase used for emphasizing that what you are saying is important Thesaurus: words used for saying that something is importantsynonym Main entry: mark * * * chiefly Brit. used to emphasize or draw attention to a statement I was… …   Useful english dictionary

  • mark you — chiefly Brit. used to emphasize or draw attention. → mark …   English new terms dictionary

  • mark you — old fashioned used for emphasizing that what you are saying is important …   English dictionary

  • Mark Jindrak — Nacimiento …   Wikipedia Español

  • mark — mark1 W2S3 [ma:k US ma:rk] n ▬▬▬▬▬▬▬ 1¦(dirt)¦ 2¦(damaged area)¦ 3¦(coloured area)¦ 4¦(writing)¦ 5¦(level/number)¦ 6¦(student s work)¦ 7 full/top marks for effort/trying/persistence etc 8 high/low mark 9 make/leave your …   Dictionary of contemporary English

  • mark — mark1 [ mark ] noun count *** ▸ 1 area of dirt/oil etc. ▸ 2 level/stage/total etc. ▸ 3 something that shows a quality ▸ 4 printed/written symbol ▸ 5 school score ▸ 6 place you try to hit ▸ 7 official sign on something ▸ 8 unit of money in Germany …   Usage of the words and phrases in modern English

  • mark — [[t]mɑ͟ː(r)k[/t]] ♦♦ marks, marking, marked 1) N COUNT A mark is a small area of something such as dirt that has accidentally got onto a surface or piece of clothing. The dogs are always rubbing against the wall and making dirty marks... A… …   English dictionary

  • mark — 1 verb 1 MAKE A MARK (I, T) to make a mark on something in a way that spoils its appearance, or to become spoiled in this way: We were careful not to mark the paintwork. | The disease had marked her face for life. | It s a beautiful table, but it …   Longman dictionary of contemporary English

  • mark */*/*/ — I UK [mɑː(r)k] / US [mɑrk] noun [countable] Word forms mark : singular mark plural marks 1) an area of an unpleasant substance such as dirt or oil on the surface of something that is different in colour from the rest There was a greasy mark on… …   English dictionary

  • mark — I. /mak / (say mahk) noun 1. a visible trace or impression upon anything, as a line, cut, dent, stain, bruise, etc. 2. a badge, brand, or other visible sign assumed or imposed. 3. a symbol used in writing or printing: a punctuation mark. 4. a… …  

  • Mark — 1. n. & v. n. 1 a trace, sign, stain, scar, etc., on a surface, face, page, etc. 2 (esp. in comb.) a a written or printed symbol (exclamation mark; question mark). b a numerical or alphabetical award denoting excellence, conduct, proficiency, etc …   Useful english dictionary

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»